Paper 4

All variants in one paper
Mostafa Barakat
0100 165 44 62
Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Classified Paper_4
Contents
Topic 1 States of matter 1
States of matter
Kinetic theory
Diffusion of gases
Topic 2 Separation Technique 15

Laboratory apparatus
Separation of mixtures
Chromatography
Topic 3 Atoms, elements and bonding 25

Atomic structure
Radioactive isotopes
Electron distribution
Ionic bonds
Covalent bonds
Macromolecular (giant) structure
Metallic Bond
Topic 4 Formula, Chemical equation and calculations 76

Chemical formula
Naming of ionic and covalent compounds
Chemical equations
Percent composition of elements
Chemical equation and calculations
Topic 5 Electrochemistry 109

Oxidation and reduction
Electrolysis
Application of electrolysis
Topic 6 Rates of Reactions 140

Speed of chemical reactions
Topic 7 Energy Change 171

Endothermic and exothermic reactions
Energy from fuel
Nuclear fuel
Electricity from chemical reactions (Cell)
i Contents Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Classified Paper_4
Topic 8 Reversible Reactions 191

Reversible reactions
Chemical equilibrium
Topic 9 Acids, Bases, Salts and Test of ions 214

Acids and Bases
The pH scale
Oxides
Making salts
Test for cations and anions
Topic 10 The periodic table 246

Group 1 elements
Group 7 elements
Noble gases
Transition elements
Trends in period 3
Topic 11 Reactivity series and Metals 261

Reactivity series of metals
Extraction of zinc
Extraction of iron
Making steel
Alloys
Topic 12 Air and Water 300
Topic 13 Non-metals 310

Nitrogen and ammonia
Sulfur and sulfuric acid
Carbon and carbonates
Topic 14 Organic Chemistry 327

Refining of petroleum
Hydrocarbons
Alkanes
Alkenes
Alcohols
Carboxylic acids and Esters
Condensation polymerisation
ii Contents Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

Data Sheet
1. Reactivity Series of Metals
Potassium Most reactive
Sodium
Calcium
Magnesium
Aluminium
Carbon
Zinc
iron
Lead
Hydrogen
Copper
Silver
Gold
Platinum Least reactive
(elements in italics, though non-metals, have
been included for comparison)
2. Formulae of Some Common Ions
Positive ions Negative ions Common Acids

Name Formula Name Formula hydrochloric acid HCl
Hydrogen H Chloride Cl  nitric acid HNO3
Sodium Na  Bromide Br  sulfuric acid H2SO4
phosphoric acid H3PO4
Silver Ag  Fluoride F
Potassium K Iodide I Common Bases
Lithium Li  Oxide O 2 sodium hydroxide NaOH
potassium KOH
Calcium Ca 2 Sulfide S 2 hydroxide
Barium Ba 2 Hydroxide OH  calcium hydroxide Ca(OH)2
Magnesium Mg 2 Sulfate SO 4 2 aqueous ammonia NH3(aq)
Zinc Zn 2 Carbonate CO 32

Lead Pb 2 Nitrate NO 3
Aluminium Al 3 nitrite NO 2
Iron(II) Fe 2
Iron(III) Fe 3
Copper(II) Cu 2
Ammonium NH 4
Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Classified Paper_4_Topic 1
1 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (2_i)

2) Ozone is a form of oxygen. Ozone is present in the upper atmosphere and
it prevents dangerous solar radiation from reaching the Earth’s surface. Some
of the chemicals that diffuse into the upper atmosphere decompose ozone.
Chemicals that have this effect are methane (CH4), chloromethane (CH3Cl)
and an oxide of nitrogen (NO2).
(i) Which of these three chemicals diffuses the most slowly? Give a reason for
your choice.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
2) Nov 2010 [33] Q (6_a, ii, b)
6 The Kinetic Theory explains the properties of matter in terms of the
arrangement and movement of particles.
(a) Nitrogen is a gas at room temperature. Nitrogen molecules, N2, which are
spread far apart move in a random manner at high speed.
(ii) How does the movement and arrangement of the molecules in a crystal of
nitrogen differ from those in gaseous nitrogen?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Use the ideas of the Kinetic Theory to explain the following.
(i) A sealed container contains nitrogen gas. The pressure of a gas is due to
the molecules of the gas hitting the walls of the container.
Explain why the pressure inside the container increases when the
temperature is increased.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The following apparatus can be used to measure the rate of diffusion of a
gas.

The following results were obtained
Explain why nitrogen diffuses faster than chlorine.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
Explain why the nitrogen diffuses faster at the higher temperature.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
3) May 2012 [31] Q (1_a)
1) The diagram below shows part of the Water Cycle.
(a) (i) State the name of each of the following changes of state.
H2O(l) 
→ H2O(g)
name ..................................................................................................................
H2O(g) 
→ H2O(l)
name ..................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Which one of the above changes of state is exothermic? Explain your
choice.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [1]

4) May 2012 [32] Q (1_c)

(c) When liquid nitrogen boils the following change occurs.
N2(l) 
→ N2(g)
The boiling point of nitrogen is very low even though the bond between the
atoms in a nitrogen molecule is very strong. Suggest an explanation.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
5) Nov 2012 [32] Q (2)
2 The diagram shows a heating curve for a sample of compound X.
(a) Is X a solid, a liquid or a gas at room temperature, 20 °C?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Write an equation for the equilibrium which exists in region BC.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Name the change of state which occurs in region DE.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Explain how the curve shows that a pure sample of compound X was
used.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

6) Nov 2012 [33] Q (3)

3 (a) A small amount of liquid bromine is added to a container which is then
sealed.
Br2(l) 
→ Br2(g)
Use the ideas of the Kinetic Theory to explain why, after about an hour, the
bromine molecules have spread uniformly to occupy the whole container.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The diagrams below show simple experiments on the speed of diffusion of
gases.
Complete the following explanations. Diagram 1 has been done for you.
Diagram 1
There is air inside and outside the porous pot so the rate of diffusion of air into
the pot is the same as the rate of diffusion of air out of the pot. The pressure

inside and outside the pot is the same so the coloured liquid is at the same
level on each side of the tube.
Diagram 2
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
Diagram 3
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
7) May 2014 [31] Q (3_a, b, c, iii)
3 (a) Different gases diffuse at different speeds.
(i) What is meant by the term diffusion?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What property of a gas molecule affects the speed at which it diffuses?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Helium is a gas used to fill balloons. It is present in the air in very small
quantities. Diffusion can be used to separate it from the air.
Air at 1000 °C is on one side of a porous barrier. The air which passes
through the barrier has a larger amount of helium in it.
(i) Why does the air on the other side of the barrier contain more helium?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why is it an advantage to have the air at a high temperature?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Most helium is obtained from natural gas found in the USA. Natural gas
contains methane and 7% helium. One possible way to obtain the helium
would be to burn the methane.
(iii) Suggest another method, other than diffusion, by which helium could be
separated from the mixture of gases in natural gas.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

8) May 2014 [33] Q (2)

2 Explain each of the following in terms of the kinetic particle theory.
(a) The rate of most reactions increases at higher temperatures.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A liquid has a fixed volume but takes up the shape of the container. A gas
takes up the shape of the container but it does not have a fixed volume.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
9) Nov 2014 [33] Q (2_a)
2 Compound X is a colourless liquid at room temperature.
(a) A sample of pure X was slowly heated from –5.0 °C, which is below its
melting point, to 90 °C, which is above its boiling point. Its temperature is
measured every minute and the results are represented on the graph.

(i) Complete the equation for the equilibrium present in the region BC.
 ....................
X(s)  [1]
(ii) What is the significance of temperature t °C?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What is the physical state of compound X in the region EF?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) What would be the difference in the region BC if an impure sample of X
had been used?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
10) May 2015 [31] Q (6_c)
(c) Gases diffuse, which means that they move to occupy the total available
volume.
(i) Explain, using kinetic particle theory, why gases diffuse.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) When the colourless gases hydrogen bromide and ethylamine come into
contact, a white solid is formed.
CH3CH2NH2(g) + HBr(g) 
→ CH3CH2NH3Br(s)
white solid
The following apparatus can be used to compare the rates of diffusion of the
two gases ethylamine and hydrogen bromide.
Predict at which position, A, B or C, the white solid will form. Explain your
choice.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

11) Nov 2015 [33] Q (1_b)

(b) How could you show that a sample of water is pure?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
12) May 2016 [43] Q (6_a)
6 Concentrated ammonia solution gives off ammonia gas. Concentrated
hydrochloric acid gives off hydrogen chloride gas. Ammonia, NH3, and
hydrogen chloride, HCl, are both colourless gases.
Ammonia reacts with hydrogen chloride to make the white solid ammonium
chloride.
Apparatus is set up as shown.
After ten minutes a white solid forms in the tube where the gases meet.
(a) (i) Write the chemical equation for the reaction of ammonia with hydrogen
chloride.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the process by which the ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases
move in the tube.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) At which point, A, B, C or D, does the white solid form? Explain why the
white solid forms at that point.
the solid forms at ..............
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(iv) The experiment was repeated at a higher temperature.
Predict how the results of the experiment would be different. Explain your
answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

13) Nov 2016 [41] Q (2)

2 Matter can exist as solid, liquid or gas. The arrows show some changes of
state.
(a) Name the changes of state represented on the diagram.

(i) A ............................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) B .............................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) C ............................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain why energy has to be supplied to turn a liquid into a gas.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The diagrams represent the same number of particles of a gas in two
containers, D and E, which have different volumes. The two containers are at
the same temperature.
In which container will the pressure be higher? Explain your answer.

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

14) Nov 2016 [42] Q (1)

1 Particles behave differently when in different physical states.
(a) Solids have a fixed volume and a definite shape.
Gases have no fixed volume and take the shape of the container.
Describe the volume and shape of liquids.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the table to show the separation, arrangement and movement of
particles in each physical state.
state separation of particles arrangement of particles movement of particles
solid
liquid touching one another randomly arranged move over one another
gas
[6]
(c) Name the following changes of state.
(i) Ice turning into water.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Solid carbon dioxide turning directly into gaseous carbon dioxide at room
temperature.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

15) Nov 2017 [41] Q (2)

2 The graph shows how the temperature of a substance changes as it is
cooled over a period of 30 minutes. The substance is a gas at the start.
Each letter on the graph may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) Which letter, S, T, V, W, X, Y or Z, shows when
(i) the particles in the substance have the most kinetic energy,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the particles in the substance are furthest apart,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) the substance exists as both a gas and a liquid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Use the graph to estimate the freezing point of the substance.
.............................. °C [1]
(c) Name the change of state directly from a solid to a gas.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) When smoke is viewed through a microscope, the smoke particles in the
air appear to jump around.
(i) What term describes this movement of the smoke particles?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the smoke particles move in this way.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

16) Nov 2017 [42] Q (1_a, b)

1 (a) Dust particles in the air move around in a random way.
(i) What term describes the random movement of the dust particles?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify the particles in the air which cause the random movement of the
dust particles.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why the dust particles move in this way.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) When chlorine gas, Cl2, is put into a gas jar, it spreads out to fill the gas
jar.
When bromine gas, Br2, is put into a gas jar, it also spreads out to fill the gas
jar.
The process takes longer for bromine gas than for chlorine gas.
(i) What term describes the way that the gas particles spread out?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use data from the Periodic Table to explain why bromine gas takes longer
to fill a gas jar than chlorine gas.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why increasing the temperature increases the rate at which the
gas particles spread out.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

17) Nov 2017 [43] Q (7_a, i, ii)

7 (a) Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV of the Periodic Table.
Carbon dioxide from the air moves into green plants and is converted into
carbohydrates.
(i) Name the process by which carbon dioxide molecules move through the air
into green plants.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why silicon(IV) oxide cannot move through the air in the same
way that carbon dioxide can.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

15 2 – Separation Technique Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (4_b, iii)

(iii) A protein can be hydrolysed to a mixture of amino acids which are
colourless. Individual amino acids can be identified by chromatography. The
Rf value of the amino acid glycine is 0.5. Describe how you could show that
glycine was present on a chromatogram.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [3]
2) May 2011 [31] Q (1)
1) The following techniques are used to separate mixtures
A simple distillation B fractional distillation C evapouration
D chromatography E filtration F diffusion
From this list, chose the most suitable techniques to separate the following
(a) methane from a mixture of the gases, methane and ethane ………… [1]
(b) water from aqueous magnesium sulphate …………….. [1]
(c) glycine from a mixture of the amino acids, glycine and lycine ………….. [1]
(d) iron filings from a mixture of iron filings and water ………. [1]
(e) zinc sulfate crystals from aqueous zinc sulfate ……………. [1]
(f) hexane from a mixture of the liquid, hexane and octane …………… [1]
3) Nov 2012 [31] Q (1)
1 A list of techniques used to separate mixtures is given below.
filtration
diffusion
fractional distillation
simple distillation
crystallisation
chromatography
From this list, choose the most suitable technique to separate the following
mixtures.
A technique may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) butane from a mixture of propane and butane ........................................ [1]
(b) oxygen from liquid air .............................................................................. [1]
(c) water from aqueous magnesium sulfate .................................................. [1]
(d) potassium chloride from aqueous potassium chloride ............................ [1]
(e) silver chloride from a mixture of silver chloride and water ....................... [1]
(f) glucose from a mixture of glucose and maltose ....................................... [1]

4) May 2013 [32] Q (7_c)

(c) Esters can be used as solvents in chromatography. The following shows a
chromatogram of plant acids.
An ester was used as the solvent and the chromatogram was sprayed with
bromothymol blue.
(i) Suggest why it was necessary to spray the chromatogram.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain what is meant by the Rf value of a sample.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate the Rf values of the two samples and use the data in the table to
identify the plant acids.

sample 1 Rf = ................ It is ..................... acid.

sample 2 Rf = ................ It is ..................... acid. [2]
5) May 2014 [31] Q (2_b)
(b) In many regions, drinking water is obtained by the distillation of sea-water.
Explain how distillation separates the water from sea-water.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
6) Nov 2014 [32] Q (1)
1 An important aspect of chemistry is purity and methods of purification.
(a) Give an example of substances used in everyday life which must be pure.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A list of techniques used to separate mixtures is given below.
chromatography crystallisation diffusion dissolving
evaporation filtration fractional distillation simple distillation
(i) From the list, choose the most suitable technique to separate the following.
water from sea-water .........................................................................................
helium from a mixture of helium and methane ...................................................
ethanol from a mixture of ethanol and propanol ................................................
iron fi lings from a mixture of iron filings and water ............................................
a mixture of two amino acids, glycine and alanine .............................................
[5]

(ii) Describe how you would obtain a pure sample of copper(II) sulfate-5-water
crystals from a mixture of copper(II) sulfate-5-water with copper(II) oxide using
some of the techniques listed above.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
7) Nov 2014 [33] Q (3_b)
(b) Fullerenes are soluble in liquid hydrocarbons such as octane. The other
solid forms of carbon are insoluble.
Describe how you could obtain crystals of fullerenes from soot which is a
mixture of fullerenes and other solid forms of carbon.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
8) May 2015 [31] Q (2)
2 Describe how to separate the following. In each example, give a description
of the procedure used and explain why this method works.
(a) Copper powder from a mixture containing copper and zinc powders.
procedure ...........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Nitrogen from a mixture of nitrogen and oxygen.
procedure ...........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]

(c) Glycine from a mixture of the two amino acids glycine and alanine. Glycine
has the lower Rf value.
procedure ...........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Magnesium hydroxide from a mixture of magnesium hydroxide and zinc
hydroxide.
procedure ...........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
9) Nov 2016 [41] Q (1_c, d, e)
1 The table gives some information about five substances.
(c) Name a method you could use to separate a mixture of substance J and
water.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Name a method you could use to obtain substance F from a mixture of
substance F and water.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Describe how you could obtain a solid sample of substance H from a
mixture of substance H and substance G.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

10) Nov 2016 [42] Q (7_c)

7 Proteins are a major constituent of food.
(c) A colourless mixture of amino acids was separated by chromatography.
Amino acid X has an Rf value of 0.8.
The chromatogram of the mixture after treatment with a locating agent is
shown.
(i) How is an Rf value calculated?
Rf =
[1]
(ii) On the diagram put a ring around the spot caused by amino acid X. [1]
(iii) Describe how you would perform a chromatography experiment to
produce the chromatogram shown in (c). Assume you have been given the
mixture of amino acids and a suitable locating agent. You are provided with
common laboratory apparatus.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

11) Nov 2016 [43] Q (3_d, i, ii)

(d) Lead(II) oxide is insoluble. A student adds solid lead(II) oxide to dilute
nitric acid until the lead(II) oxide is in excess. Aqueous lead(II) nitrate and
water are produced.
(i) What is meant by the term excess?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) How would the student know when the lead(II) oxide is in excess?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
12) Nov 2016 [43] Q (6_c, ii)
(ii) Starting with a sample of protein, describe how to produce, separate,
detect and identify the monomers which make it up.
Your answer should include
• the name of the process used to break down the protein into its monomers,
• the name of the process used to separate the monomers,
• the method used to detect the monomers after they have been separated,
• the method used to identify the monomers after they have been separated.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
13) May 2017 [42] Q (1_a)
1 (a) State the name of the process that is used to
(i) separate oxygen from liquid air,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) separate the individual dyes in ink,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) obtain water from aqueous sodium chloride,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) separate the precipitate formed when aqueous silver nitrate is added to
aqueous sodium chloride.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

14) May 2018 [41] Q (1_b, c)

(b) Mixtures can be separated by physical processes.
A sequence of physical processes can be used to separate common salt
(sodium chloride) from a mixture containing sand and common salt only.
Give the order and the correct scientific term for the physical processes used
to separate the common salt from the mixture.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
3 .........................................................................................................................
[4]
The boiling points of four different alcohols, A, B, C and D, are shown.
alcohol A B C D
boiling point / °C 56 78 122 160
(c) A student suggested that the apparatus shown could be used to separate
the mixture of alcohols.
(i) Apparatus X needs to have cold water flowing through it.

● Draw an arrow on the diagram to show where the cold water enters
apparatus X.
● Name apparatus X.
............................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Part of the fractionating column is missing. This means that the experiment
will not work.
● Draw on the diagram the part of the fractionating column which is missing.
● Explain why the experiment will not work with this part of the fractionating
column missing.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Suggest why a Bunsen burner is not used to heat the flask.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) A hot water bath cannot be used to separate alcohols C and D.
Explain why.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
15) May 2018 [42] Q (1)
1 Give the name of the process that is used:
(a) to obtain water from aqueous sodium chloride
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) to produce lead from molten lead(II) bromide
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) to separate an insoluble solid from a liquid
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) to separate the components of petroleum
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) to separate a mixture of coloured dyes.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

25 3 – Elements, compounds and bonding Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 Q (5_a, b i, ii)

5 Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV. Both elements have
macromolecular structures.
(a) Diamond and graphite are two forms of the element carbon.
(i) Explain why diamond is a very hard substance.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give one use of diamond.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why graphite is a soft material.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) give one use of graphite.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Two of the oxides of these elements are carbon dioxide, CO2, and
silicon(IV) oxide, SiO2.
(i) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one
molecule of the covalent compound carbon dioxide.
Use x to represent an electron from a carbon atom.
Use o to represent an electron from an oxygen atom.
[3]
(ii) A section of the macromolecular structure of silicon(IV) oxide is given
below.
Use this diagram to explain why the formula is SiO2 not SiO4.
....................................................................................................................... [2]

2) Nov 2010 [31] Q (1)

1 The table gives the composition of three particles.
(a) What is the evidence in the table for each of the following?
(i) Particle A is an atom.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) They are all particles of the same element.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Particle B is a negative ion.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Particles A and C are isotopes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) What is the electronic structure of particle A?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the valency of the element?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Is the element a metal or a non-metal? Give a reason for your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
3) Nov 2010 [31] Q (4_a)
4 Ammonia is an important industrial chemical.
(a) (i) Give the electron structure of an atom of nitrogen.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use this electronic structure, rather than the valency of nitrogen, to explain
why the formula of ammonia is NH3 not NH4.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

4) Nov 2010 [32] Q (1)

1 The following table gives information about six substances.
(a) Which substance could have a macromolecular structure, similar to that of

silicon(IV) oxide?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which substances are solids at room temperature?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which substance could be a metal?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which substance could be aqueous sodium chloride?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Which substance is an ionic compound?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Which substances are liquids at room temperature?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
5) Nov 2010 [33] Q (1)
1 The diagrams below show the electron arrangement in two compounds
(a) In a water molecule, each hydrogen atom is bonded to the oxygen atom by
sharing a pair of electrons.
Why does an oxygen atom share two pairs of electrons rather than just one
pair?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Describe how a potassium atom becomes a potassium ion.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Why is there a bond between the ions in potassium chloride?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Solid potassium chloride is a poor conductor of electricity. When dissolved
in water it is a good conductor. Explain.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
6) Nov 2010 [33] Q (6_a i)
6 The Kinetic Theory explains the properties of matter in terms of the
arrangement and movement of particles.
(a) Nitrogen is a gas at room temperature. Nitrogen molecules, N2, which are
spread far apart move in a random manner at high speed.
(i) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in a
nitrogen molecule.
Use × to represent an electron from a nitrogen atom.
[2]
7) May 2011 Q (2_b)
b) The electronic distribution of a selenium atom is 2+8+18+6
(i) selenium forms an ionic compound, with potassium. Draw a diagram which
shows the formula of this ionic compound, the charges on ions and the
arrangement of the valency electrons around the negative ion
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of potassium
Use × to represent an electron from an atom of selenium
[3]

(ii) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valence electrons in one
molecule of the covalent compound selenium chloride
Use × to represent an electron from an atom of selenium
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of chlorine
[3]
(iii) predict two differences in the physical properties of these twocompounds
…………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………… [2]
8) May 2011 [31] Q (3_c)

(c) Both iron and steel have typical metallic structure a lattice of positive ions
and a sea of electrons.
(i) suggest an explanation for why they have high melting point
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why, when a force is applied to a piece of steel, it does not break
but just changes its shape
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
9) May 2011 [32] Q (7_a)
7 Chlorine reacts with phosphorus to form phosphorus trichloride.
(a) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one
molecule of the covalent compound, phosphorus trichloride.
Use x to represent an electron from a phosphorus atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.
[2]

10) Nov 2011 [31] Q (1_c ii)

(ii) Draw a diagram which shows the formula of lithium oxide, the charges on
the ions and the arrangement of the valency electrons around the negative
ion.
Use x to represent an electron from an atom of oxygen.
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of lithium.
[2]
11) Nov 2011 [32] Q (1)
1 Cobalt is an element in Period 4 of the Periodic Table.
(a) Use your copy of the Periodic Table to help you complete the table below.
Particle Number of Number of Number of

Protons Neutron electrons
Co
Co2+
(b) 60Co is a cobalt isotope.

(i) Explain the term isotope.
.................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain why two isotopes of the same element have identical chemical
properties.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State one industrial use and one medical use of radioactive isotopes.
industrial use ................................................................................................. [1]
medical use ................................................................................................... [1]

12) Nov 2011 [32] Q (4)

4 The structure of an element or compound determines its physical properties.
Scandium fluoride and silicon (IV) oxide have giant structures.
(a) Scandium fluoride is an ionic compound.
(i) The valency of scandium is three. Draw a diagram which shows the
formula of the compound, the charges on the ions and the arrangement of the
valency electrons around the negative ion.
Use x to represent an electron from a scandium atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a fluorine atom.
[3]
(ii) The melting point of scandium fluoride is 1552 °C. Explain why scandium
fluoride has a high melting point.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Silicon(IV) oxide has a macromolecular structure.
(i) Describe the structure of silicon(IV) oxide. You may use a diagram.
[3]
(ii) How does the electrical conductivity of these two compounds differ?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain the difference in conductivity.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

13) Nov 2011 [32] Q (5_c)

(c) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one
molecule of the covalent compound methanol.
Use ● to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom.
[3]
14) Nov 2011 [33] Q (7_b, i)
(b) The structural formula of propene is drawn below.
molecule of this covalent compound.
Use x to represent an electron from an atom of carbon.
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of hydrogen.
[3]

15) May 2012 [32] Q (1_d)

(d) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the outer shell (valency)
electrons in a molecule of nitrogen.
[2]
16) May 2012 [32] Q (2)
2 Diamond and graphite are different forms of the same element, carbon.
Explain the following in terms of their structure.
(a) Graphite is a soft material which is used as a lubricant.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Diamond is a very hard material which is used for drilling and cutting.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Graphite is a good conductor of electricity and diamond is a poor
conductor.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
17) May 2012 [32] Q (3_e)
(e) Describe the bonding in a typical metal.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
18) Nov 2012 [31] Q (2_b)
131
(b) A radioactive isotope of iodine, 53 I , is used to treat cancer.
(i) Define the term isotope.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

131
(ii) How many protons, electrons and neutrons are there in one atom of 53 I ?
number of protons ..............
number of electrons ............
number of neutrons ............ [2]
131
(iii) W hen this isotope, 53 I , emits radiation, a different element with a proton
number of 54 is formed.
What is the name of this element?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
19) Nov 2012 [31] Q (4_a, b)
4 Silicon(IV) oxide, SiO2, and zirconium(IV) oxide, ZrO2, are both
macromolecules.
They have similar physical properties but silicon(IV) oxide is acidic and
zirconium(IV) oxide is amphoteric.
(a) Define the term macromolecule.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Predict three physical properties of these two oxides.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name an element which has the same physical properties as these two
oxides.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
20) Nov 2012 [31] Q (5_c)
(c) The structural formula of carbonyl chloride is given below.
Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the outer (valency) electrons in

one molecule of this covalent compound.
Use o to represent an electron from a carbon atom.
Use x to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.
Use ● to represent an electron from an oxygen atom.

[3]
21) Nov 2012 [31] Q (7_a, i, ii, iv)
7 Both strontium and sulfur have chlorides of the type XCl2. The table below
compares some of their properties.
(a) (i) Use the data in the table to explain why sulfur chloride is a liquid at
room temperature, 25 °C.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Strontium is a metal and sulfur is a non-metal. Explain why both have
chlorides of the type XCl2.
The electron distribution of a strontium atom is 2 + 8 + 18 + 8 + 2.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain the difference in the electrical conductivity of liquid strontium
chloride and liquid sulfur chloride.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

22) Nov 2012 [32] Q (7_a, iii)

7 The alcohols form a homologous series. The first member of this series is
methanol, CH3OH.
(iii) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the outer (valency) electrons
in one molecule of methanol.
Use o to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom.
Use ● to represent an electron from an oxygen atom.
[3]
23) Nov 2012 [33] Q (6_a, iii)
6 Until recently, arsenic poisoning, either deliberate or accidental, has been a
frequent cause of death. The symptoms of arsenic poisoning are identical with
those of a common illness, cholera. A reliable test was needed to prove the
presence of arsenic in a body
(ii) Draw a diagram which shows the arrangement of the outer (valency)
electrons in one molecule of the covalent compound arsine.
The electron distribution of arsenic is 2 + 8 + 18 + 5.
Use x to represent an electron from an arsenic atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom
[2]

24) May 2013 [31] Q (2_a, b, c, d)

2 An element, M, has the electron distribution 2 + 8 + 18 + 3.
(a) Which group in the Periodic Table is element M likely to be in?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Predict whether element M is a poor or a good conductor of electricity.
Give a reason for your answer.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Binary compounds contain two atoms per molecule, for example HCl.
Identify an element which could form a binary compound with element M.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Predict the formula of the sulfate of M. The formula of the sulfate ion is
SO24−
....................................................................................................................... [1]
25) May 2013 [31] Q (6_d)
(d) The structural formula of hydrazine is given below.
Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one

molecule of the covalent compound hydrazine.
Use x to represent an electron from a nitrogen atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom.
[3]

26) May 2013 [31] Q (8_a, b, c)

8 There are three types of giant structure - ionic, metallic and giant covalent.
(a) In an ionic compound, the ions are held in a lattice by strong forces.
(i) Explain the term lattice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the ions are held together by strong forces.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe the bonding in a typical metal.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The electrical conductivities of the three types of giant structure are given
in the following table.
Explain the differences in electrical conductivity between the three types of

giant structure and the difference, if any, between the solid and liquid states of
the same structure.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[5]

27) May 2013 [32] Q (2_a, b, c, d)

2 (a) The table below gives the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in
atoms or ions. Complete the table. The first line is given as an example.
You will need to use the Periodic Table.
[6]
(b) Using the data in the table, explain how you can determine whether a
particle is an atom, a negative ion or a positive ion.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
28) May 2013 [33] Q (1_a, b, c)
1 Substances can be classified as:
elements mixtures compounds
Elements can be divided into:
metals non-metals
(a) Define each of the following terms.
(i) element
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) compound
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) mixture
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Classify each of the following as either an element, compound or mixture.

(i) brass ......................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) carbon dioxide ......................................................................................... [1]
(iii) copper ..................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which physical property is used to distinguish between metals and non-
metals?
It is possessed by all metals but by only one non-metal.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
29) May 2013 [33] Q (4_a, b, c)
4 Germanium is an element in Group IV. The electron distribution of a
germanium atom is 2 + 8 + 18 + 4. It has oxidation states of +2 and +4.
(a) Germanium forms a series of saturated hydrides similar to the alkanes.
(i) Draw the structural formula of the hydride which contains three germanium
atoms per molecule.
[1]
(ii) Predict the general formula of the germanium hydrides.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one
molecule of the covalent compound germanium(IV) chloride, GeCl4.
Use o to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.
Use x to represent an electron from a germanium atom.
[2]

(c) Describe the structure of the giant covalent compound germanium(IV)

oxide, GeO2.
It has a similar structure to that of silicon(IV) oxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
30) Nov 2013 [31] Q (1)
1 For each of the following, name an element which matches the description.
(a) It is used as a fuel in nuclear reactors.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) It is the only non-metal which is a good conductor of electricity.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Inert electrodes are made from this metal.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) This gaseous element is used to fill balloons in preference to hydrogen.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) An element which can form an ion of the type X3–.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) It has the same electron distribution as the calcium ion, Ca2+.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) The element is in Period 5 and Group VI.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
31) Nov 2013 [31] Q (6_a, b)
6 Lead is an excellent roofing material. It is malleable and resistant to
corrosion. Lead rapidly becomes coated with basic lead carbonate which
protects it from further corrosion.
(a) Lead has a typical metallic structure which is a lattice of lead ions
surrounded by a ‘sea’ of mobile electrons. This structure is held together by
attractive forces called a metallic bond.
(i) Explain why there are attractive forces in a metallic structure.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why a metal, such as lead, is malleable.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

32) Nov 2013 [32] Q (1)

1 The table gives the melting points, the boiling points and the electrical
properties of six substances A to F.
(a) Which two substances could be metals?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which substance could be nitrogen?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which substance is an ionic solid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which substance is a liquid at room temperature?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Which substance has a giant covalent structure similar to that of diamond?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Which two substances could exist as simple covalent molecules?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
33) Nov 2013 [33] Q (1_a, b i, ii)
1 Zirconium (Zr) is a metal in Period 5. Its main oxidation state is +4.
90 91 92
(a) The following are all zirconium atoms: 40 Zr, 40 Zr and 40 Zr
In terms of numbers of electrons, neutrons and protons, how are these three
atoms the same and how are they different?
They are the same because ..............................................................................
............................................................................................................................
They are different because ................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]

(b) Containers for fuel rods in nuclear reactors are made of zirconium.
Nuclear reactors are used to produce energy and to make radioactive
isotopes.
(i) Which isotope of a different element is used as a fuel in nuclear reactors?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one medical and one industrial use of radioactive isotopes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Above 900 °C, zirconium reacts with water to form zirconium(IV) oxide,
ZrO2, and hydrogen. Write an equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
34) Nov 2013 [33] Q (2_a, b)
2 (a) The diagram shows the lattice of a typical ionic compound.
(i) Explain the term ionic lattice.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) In this lattice, the ratio of positive ions to negative ions is 1:1.
In the lattice of a different ionic compound, the ratio of positive ions to
negative ions is 1:2.
Suggest why this ratio varies in different ionic compounds.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give three physical properties of ionic compounds.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Strontium oxide is an ionic compound. Draw a diagram which shows its
formula, the charges on the ions and the arrangement of the valency
electrons around the negative ion.
The electron distribution of a strontium atom is 2 + 8 + 18 + 8 + 2.
Use o to represent an electron from a strontium atom.
Use x to represent an electron from an oxygen atom.
[3]
35) May 2014 [31] Q (1)
1 The table below gives the composition of six particles which are either
atoms or ions.
(a) Which particles are atoms? Explain your choice.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Which particle is a negative ion and why has this particle got a negative
charge?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Which particles are positive ions?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Explain why particle A and particle D are isotopes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

36) May 2014 [31] Q (4_a)

4 In the Periodic Table, the elements are arranged in columns called Groups
and in rows called Periods.
(a) (i) Complete the table for some of the elements in Period 3.
group number I II III IV V VI VII
symbol Na Mg Al Si P S Cl
number of
valency electrons
valency
[2]
(ii) What is the relationship between the group number and the number of
valency electrons?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain the relationship between the number of valency electrons and the
valency for the elements Na to Al,
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
for the elements P to Cl.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[4]
37) May 2014 [32] Q (1_a)
1 The table below gives the electron distributions of atoms of different
elements.

For each of the following, select an element or elements from the table that
matches the description.
Each element may be selected once, more than once or not at all.
(a) These two elements are in the same group.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) This element forms a fluoride with a formula of the type XF3.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) This element has a macromolecular structure similar to that of diamond.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The only oxidation state of this element is 0.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) This element is bromine.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) This element is a good conductor of electricity.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
38) May 2014 [32] Q (5_c)
(c) The structural formula of carbonyl chloride is given below
Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons around the
atoms in one molecule of this covalent compound.
Use x to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.
Use ● to represent an electron from a carbon atom.
[3]

39) May 2014 [32] Q (6_b)

(b) Scandium fluoride is an ionic compound. The valency of scandium in
scandium fluoride is three.
Draw a diagram which shows the formula of this compound, the charges on
the ions and the arrangement of the valency electrons around the negative
ions.
Use to x represent an electron from a fluorine atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a scandium atom.
[3]
40) May 2014 [33] Q (4_b, i, ii)
(b) (i) Describe the structure of a typical metal such as iron. You may include
a diagram.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain why pure iron is malleable.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

41) Nov 2014 [31] Q (2)

2 Two macromolecular forms of carbon are graphite and diamond. The
structures of graphite and diamond are given below.
(a) Explain in terms of its structure why graphite is soft and is a good
conductor of electricity.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State two uses of graphite which depend on the above properties.
It is soft ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
It is a good conductor of electricity .....................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Silicon(IV) oxide also has a macromolecular structure.
(i) Describe the macromolecular structure of silicon(IV) oxide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Predict two physical properties which diamond and silicon(IV) oxide have
in common.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

42) Nov 2014 [31] Q (7)

7 Nitrogen can form ionic compounds with reactive metals and covalent
compounds with non-metals.
(a) Nitrogen reacts with lithium to form the ionic compound lithium nitride,
Li3N.
(i) Write the equation for the reaction between lithium and nitrogen.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Lithium nitride is an ionic compound. Draw a diagram which shows its
formula, the charges on the ions and the arrangement of the valency
electrons around the negative ion.
Use x for an electron from a lithium atom.
Use o for an electron from a nitrogen atom.
[2]
(b) Nitrogen fluoride is a covalent compound.
molecule of the covalent compound nitrogen trifluoride, NF3.
Use x for an electron from a nitrogen atom.
Use o for an electron from a fluorine atom.
[2]
(ii) Lithium nitride has a high melting point, 813 °C. Nitrogen trifluoride has a
low melting point, –207 °C.
Explain why the melting points are different.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

43) Nov 2014 [33] Q (3_a, i, c, i, ii)

3 In 1985 the fullerenes were discovered. They are solid forms of the element
carbon. The structure of the C60 fullerene is given below.
(c) A mixture of a fullerene and potassium is an excellent conductor of

electricity.
(i) Which other form of solid carbon is a good conductor of electricity?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why metals, such as potassium, are good conductors of electricity.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
44) May 2015 [32] Q (1)
1 Complete the following table which gives the number of protons, electrons
and neutrons in each of the five particles.
[8]

45) May 2015 [32] Q (2)

2 The table shows the melting points, boiling points and electrical properties
of five substances, A to E.
Choose a substance from the table above to match each of the following
descriptions. A substance may be used once, more than once or not at all.
Justify each choice with evidence from the table.
One has been completed as an example.
(a) This substance has a giant covalent structure. ..................

evidence .............................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) This substance is a metal. ..................
evidence .............................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) This substance is a liquid at room temperature (25 °C). ..................
evidence .............................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) This substance is an ionic solid. ..................
evidence .............................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
46) May 2015 [32] Q (3_a, b)
3 Calcium reacts with nitrogen to form the ionic compound calcium nitride,
Ca3N2.
(a) Draw a diagram, based on the correct formula, which shows the charges
on the ions and the arrangement of the electrons around the negative ion.

Use o to represent an electron from a calcium atom.

Use x to represent an electron from a nitrogen atom.
[3]
(b) In the lattice of calcium nitride, the ratio of calcium ions to nitride ions is 3 : 2.
(i) What is meant by the term lattice?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) In terms of ionic charges, explain why the ratio of ions is 3 : 2.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
47) May 2015 [33] Q (1)
1 Use your copy of the Periodic Table to help you answer these questions.
(a) Predict the formula of each of the following compounds.
(i) aluminium fluoride .................................................................................... [1]
(ii) arsenic oxide ........................................................................................... [1]
(iii) silicon bromide ........................................................................................ [1]
(b) Deduce the formula of each of the following ions.
(i) phosphide ................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) barium ...................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) francium .................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one
molecule of the covalent compound carbon dioxide.
[3]

48) Nov 2015 [31] Q (1)

1 (a) The symbols of six particles are shown below.
Na+ Ca2+ Kr P Si O2–
Select from the list of particles to answer the following questions. A particle
may be selected once, more than once or not at all.
(i) Which two ions have the same electronic structure? ............................... [1]
(ii) Which ion has the same electronic structure as an atom of argon? ........ [1]
(iii) Which atom can form an ion of the type X3–? ......................................... [1]
(iv) Which atom can form a hydride which has a formula of the type XH4? ….... [1]
(b) (i) How many protons, neutrons and electrons are there in one copper(II)
ion 64 2+
29 Cu ?
number of protons .....................

number of neutrons .....................
number of electrons .....................
[2]
45
(ii) 21 Sc represents an atom of scandium.
How many nucleons and how many charged particles are there in one atom of
scandium?
number of nucleons .....................
number of charged particles .....................
[2]
23 24
(c) Two different atoms of sodium are 11 Na and 11 Na
(i) Explain why these two atoms are isotopes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
24
(ii) 11 Na is radioactive. It changes into an atom of a different element which
has one more proton.
Identify this element.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State two uses of radioactive isotopes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

49) Nov 2015 [31] Q (6_a)

6 Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV. They both form oxides of the
type XO2.
(a) Silicon(IV) oxide, SiO2, has a macromolecular structure.
(i) Describe the structure of silicon(IV) oxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State three properties which silicon(IV) oxide and diamond have in
common.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Explain why the physical properties of carbon dioxide are different from
those of diamond and silicon(IV) oxide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
50) Nov 2015 [32] Q (2)
1 Use your copy of the Periodic Table to help you answer some of these
questions.
(a) Predict the formulae of the following compounds.
(i) nitrogen fluoride
..................................................................................................................
(ii) phosphorus sulfide
.................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Deduce the formulae of the following ions.
(i) selenide
............................................................................................................................
(ii) gallium
............................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Use the following ions to determine the formulae of the compounds.
ions OH– Cr3+ Ba2+ SO42–
compounds
(i) chromium(III) sulfate ......................................................................................
(ii) barium hydroxide ..........................................................................................
[2]
51) Nov 2015 [33] Q (3_a)
3 Lithium bromide is an ionic compound. It can be electrolysed when it is
molten or in aqueous solution. It cannot be electrolysed as a solid.
(a) Solid lithium bromide is a poor conductor of electricity. The ions cannot
move to the electrodes, they are held in an ionic lattice by strong forces.
(i) Describe the motion of the ions in the solid state.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Define the term ionic bonding.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) What is meant by the term ionic lattice?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
52) May 2016 [41] Q (1_a)
1 Protons, neutrons and electrons are subatomic particles.
(a) Complete the table to show the relative mass and relative charge of a
proton, a neutron and an electron.
particle relative mass relative charge
proton
neutron
1
electron
1840
[3]
(b) Bromine has two isotopes.
(i) Define the term isotope.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why the two isotopes of bromine have the same chemical
properties.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The table shows the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in some
atoms and ions.
Complete the table.
number of number of number of

particle
protons neutrons electrons
7
3 Li
34
16 S2−
19 22 18
[5]
53) May 2016 [41] Q (2_d)
(d) Silicon(IV) oxide has a giant structure.
(i) Name the type of bonding in silicon(IV) oxide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give two physical properties of silicon(IV) oxide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Calcium phosphate is used in fertilisers. The bonding in calcium
phosphate is ionic.
Calcium phosphate contains the phosphate ion, PO43–.
(i) What is ionic bonding?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Deduce the formula of calcium phosphate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

54) May 2016 [42] Q (2)

2 (a) (i) Define the term atomic number.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Define the term nucleon number.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The table shows the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in some
atoms or ions.
Complete the table. The first line is given as an example.
particle number of number of number of symbol or

protons electrons neutrons formula
A 6 6 6 12
6 C
B 12 12 12
C 8 16
8 O2−
D 11 10 13
[6]
55) May 2016 [42] Q (3_a, b)
3 Gallium is a metallic element in Group III. It has similar properties to
aluminium.
(a) (i) Describe the structure and bonding in a metallic element.
You should include a labelled diagram in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why metallic elements such as gallium are good conductors of
electricity.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Give the formula of
gallium(III) chloride, ............................................................................................
gallium(III) sulfate. ..............................................................................................
[2]

56) May 2016 [43] Q (4_a)

4 (a) Potassium iodide is an ionic compound.
(i) Describe what happens, in terms of electron loss and gain, when a
potassium atom reacts with an iodine atom.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the structure of solid potassium iodide. You may draw a diagram.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why potassium iodide has a high melting point.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
57) May 2016 [43] Q (6_c)
(c) The diagram shows the electron arrangement in a molecule of ammonia,
showing only outer shell electrons.
(i) State the type of bonding in ammonia.

....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Hydrazine, N2H4, is another compound of nitrogen and hydrogen.

Complete the diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
hydrazine, showing only outer shell electrons.
[3]
58) Nov 2016 [41] Q (1_a, b, f)
1 The table gives some information about five substances.
(a) Which substance in the table has ionic bonding?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which substance in the table has a giant covalent structure?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Substance J is a metal.
Describe how substance J is able to conduct electricity when it is a solid.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

59) Nov 2016 [42] Q (2)

2 This question is about atoms, ions and isotopes.
(a) Define the term nucleon number.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Give the electronic structure of the following atom and ion.
Na ......................................................................................................................
P3– ......................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State one medical use of radioactive isotopes.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) What is meant by the term relative atomic mass?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Suggest why the relative atomic mass of chlorine is not a whole number.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(f) Aluminium is a metal in Group III.
Describe the bonding in aluminium.
Include a labelled diagram and any appropriate charges in your answer.
[3]

60) Nov 2016 [43] Q (1)

1 (a) Complete the table.
particle charge relative mass
proton +1
neutron 1
electron
[2]
(b) The following are isotopes of carbon.
12 13 14
6 C 6 C 6 C
(i) In terms of numbers of protons, neutrons and electrons, how are these
three isotopes the same and how are they different?
They are the same because ..............................................................................
............................................................................................................................
They are different because ................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Why do all isotopes of carbon have the same chemical properties?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Name two forms of the element carbon which have giant covalent
structures.
................................................... and ............................................................ [1]
(d) Complete the diagram to show the electron arrangement in a carbon
dioxide molecule.
Show the outer shell electrons only.
[3]

61) Nov 2016 [43] Q (2_a, b, c, d, i)

2 Beryllium is a metallic element in Group II.
(a) Give the electronic structure of a beryllium atom.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Give the formula of beryllium oxide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) Describe the bonding in a metallic element such as beryllium.
Include a labelled diagram and any appropriate charges in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why metallic elements, such as beryllium, are good conductors of
electricity.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Beryllium hydroxide is amphoteric.
Beryllium hydroxide reacts with acids. The salts formed contain positive
beryllium ions.
(i) Give the formula of the positive beryllium ion.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
62) May 2017 [41] Q (1)
1 This question is about subatomic particles.
(a) Define the terms
proton number, ...................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
nucleon number. ................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Why is the 11H hydrogen atom the only atom to have an identical proton
number and nucleon number?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Complete the table to show the number of protons, neutrons and electrons
in the atoms and ions given.
[6]
(d) (i) Write the formula of the compound formed from fluorine and
magnesium.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the formula of the compound formed from Sr2+ and P3–.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
63) May 2017 [42] Q (1_b)
(b) State what is meant by the terms
(i) element,
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) compound,
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) ion.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
64) May 2017 [42] Q (2_a, b, c, e)
2 Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV of the Periodic Table. Both
carbon and silicon exist as more than one isotope.
(a) Define the term isotopes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Complete the following table which gives information about carbon atoms
and silicon atoms.
[3]
(c) Silicon has a giant structure which is similar to the structure of diamond.
(i) Name the type of bond which is present between silicon atoms in silicon.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two physical properties of silicon.
Use your knowledge of structure and bonding to explain why silicon has these
physical properties.
property 1 ...........................................................................................................
reason 1 .............................................................................................................
property 2 ...........................................................................................................
reason 2 .............................................................................................................
[4]
(e) Carbon dioxide, CO2, is a gas at room temperature and pressure, whereas
silicon(IV) oxide, SiO2, is a solid.
(i) Name the type of structure which the following compounds have.
carbon dioxide ............................................................................................... [1]
silicon(IV) oxide ............................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use your knowledge of structure and bonding to explain why carbon
dioxide is a gas at room temperature and pressure, whereas silicon(IV) oxide
is a solid.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

65) May 2017 [43] Q (1)

1 Six different atoms can be represented as follows.
(a) Answer the following questions using atoms from the list. Each atom may
be used once, more than once or not at all.
Select one atom from the six shown which
(i) has exactly seven protons,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) has exactly six neutrons,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) has more protons than neutrons,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) has the electronic structure [2, 5],
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) is an atom of an element from Group VII of the Periodic Table,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) is an atom of a noble gas.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Two of the six atoms shown are isotopes of each other.
(i) What is meant by the term isotopes?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Which two of the six atoms shown are isotopes of each other?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why do isotopes have identical chemical properties?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
66) May 2017 [43] Q (3)
3 Magnesium is a metal.
(a) Describe the structure and bonding in magnesium.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Why can magnesium conduct electricity when solid?

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Why is magnesium malleable?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Magnesium reacts with sulfur to form the ionic compound magnesium
sulfide, MgS.
The diagrams show the electronic structures of atoms of magnesium and
sulfur.
(i) Complete the diagrams to show the electronic structures of the ions in
magnesium sulfide.
Show the charges on the ions.
[3]
(ii) Ionic compounds, such as magnesium sulfide, do not conduct electricity
when solid.
Magnesium sulfide does not dissolve in water.
Magnesium sulfide does conduct electricity under certain conditions.

State the conditions needed for magnesium sulfide to conduct electricity.

Explain why magnesium sulfide conducts electricity under these conditions.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
67) Nov 2017 [41] Q (1)
1 The table gives information about five particles. The particles are all atoms
or ions.
Answer the following questions using the information in the table.

Each particle may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) Which particle, A, B, C, D or E,
(i) is an atom with atomic number 12,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) is an atom with nucleon number 14,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) is an ion with a positive charge,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) has only one electron in its outer shell?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) D is an ion of an element.
Identify the element and write the formula of D.
........................................................................................................................ [2]

68) Nov 2017 [41] Q (4_c, ii)

(ii) A molecule of ethanoic acid has the structure shown.
Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in

ethanoic acid.
Show outer shell electrons only.
[3]
69) Nov 2017 [41] Q (6_b)
(b) Aluminium oxide is an ionic compound with a high melting point.
(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in
one of the oxide ions present in aluminium oxide. Include the charge on the
oxide ion.
One of the aluminium ions is shown
[2]

(ii) The melting point of aluminium oxide is above 2000 °C.

Explain why aluminium oxide has a high melting point.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
70) Nov 2017 [42] Q (2)
2 (a) Complete the table to show the electronic structure of the atoms and
ions.
(b) Predict the formula of the compound formed between Ca2+ and N3–.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangements in the
two ions present in lithium chloride, LiCl.
Show outer shell electrons only. Include the charges on the ions.
[3]
(d) Sulfur dichloride, SCl2, is a covalent compound. It has the structure Cl –S–Cl.
Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a
molecule of sulfur dichloride.
Show outer shell electrons only.
[3]

(e) In terms of attractive forces, explain why LiCl has a higher melting point
than SCl2.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(f) Suggest the identity of a covalent compound with a higher melting point
than LiCl.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
71) Nov 2017 [43] Q (1)
1 Substances can be classified as elements, compounds or mixtures.
State whether each of the following is an element, a compound or a mixture.
(a) brass ........................................................................................................ [1]
(b) gold .......................................................................................................... [1]
(c) butane ...................................................................................................... [1]
(d) air ............................................................................................................ [1]
72) Nov 2017 [43] Q (2)
2 (a) (i) Define the term molecule.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Define the term element.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The table shows the composition of four atoms or ions, A, B, C and D.
(i) What is the atomic number of A?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the nucleon number of B?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Which of A, B, C and D are isotopes of each other?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which of A, B, C and D are atoms?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Which of A, B, C and D are positive ions?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the table.
[3]
73) Nov 2017 [43] Q (3_c)
(c) (i) Describe the bonding in iron. Include a diagram in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Use your diagram in (c)(i) to explain why iron is malleable.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Iron containing a small amount of carbon is known as steel.
Explain why steel is less malleable than iron.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
74) May 2018 [41] Q (1_a)
1 Substances can be classified as elements, compounds or mixtures.
(a) What is meant by the term compound ?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

75) May 2018 [41] Q (2)

2 Flerovium, Fl, atomic number 114, was first made in research laboratories in
1998.
(a) Flerovium was made by bombarding atoms of plutonium, Pu, atomic
number 94, with atoms of element Z.
●● The nucleus of one atom of plutonium combined with the nucleus of one
atom of element Z.
●● This formed the nucleus of one atom of flerovium.
Suggest the identity of element Z.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In which period of the Periodic Table is flerovium?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Predict the number of outer shell electrons in an atom of flerovium.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Two isotopes of flerovium are 286Fl and 289Fl. The nuclei of both of these
isotopes are unstable and emit energy when they split up.
(i) State the term used to describe isotopes with unstable nuclei.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the table to show the number of protons, neutrons and electrons
in the atoms of the isotopes shown.
[2]
(e) Only a relatively small number of atoms of flerovium have been made in
the laboratory and the properties of flerovium have not yet been investigated.
It has been suggested that flerovium is a typical metal.
(i) Suggest two physical properties of flerovium.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest one chemical property of flerovium oxide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

76) May 2018 [42] Q (2_a)

2 This question is about the elements in Period 3 of the Periodic Table.
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
may be used once, more than once or not at all.

State which Period 3 element:
(a) forms an oxide with a macromolecular structure
....................................................................................................................... [1]
77) May 2018 [42] Q (3)
3 Complete the following table.
[6]
78) May 2018 [42] Q (4_a, b, d, e)
4 Potassium reacts with bromine at room temperature to form potassium
bromide.
(a) Write a chemical equation for this reaction. Include state symbols.
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Potassium bromide exists as an ionic lattice.
Potassium bromide does not conduct electricity when solid but does conduct
electricity when molten.
(i) What is meant by the term ionic lattice?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why potassium bromide does not conduct electricity when solid
but does conduct electricity when molten.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Iodine reacts with chlorine to form iodine monochloride, ICl, as the only
product.
(i) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a
molecule of iodine monochloride. Show outer shell electrons only.
[2]
(e) Potassium bromide has a melting point of 734 °C.
Iodine monochloride has a melting point of 27 °C.
In terms of attractive forces, explain why there is a large difference between
these melting points.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
79) May 2018 [43] Q (2_a)
2 (a) 29Al is a radioactive isotope of aluminium. The only non‑radioactive
isotope of aluminium is 27Al.
(i) Describe, in terms of protons, neutrons and electrons, how the isotopes
29
Al and 27Al are similar and how they are different.
how they are similar ...........................................................................................
how they are different ........................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the table to show the number of nucleons, neutrons and
27
electrons in an 13 Al3+ ion.
[3]

Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Classified Paper_4 _ Topic 4
76 4 – Formula, Chemical equation and calculations Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)
1) May 2010 [31] Q (7_e)

(e) The titanium ore contains 36.8% iron, 31.6% titanium and the remainder is
oxygen.
(i) Determine the percentage of oxygen in this titanium compound.
percentage of oxygen = ........................................................................... % [1]
(ii) Calculate the number of moles of atoms for each element.
The number of moles of Fe is shown as an example.
number of moles of Fe = 36.8 / 56 = 0.66
number of moles of Ti = .....................................................................................
number of moles of O = ................................................................................ [1]
(iii) What is the simplest ratio for the moles of atoms?
Fe : Ti : O
……… ……… ………
[1]
(iv) what is the formula of this titanium compound?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
2) May 2010 [32] Q (8_c)
(c) A 5.00 g sample of impure lead (II) nitrate was heated. The volume of
oxygen formed was 0.16 dm3 measured at r.t.p. The impurities did not
decompose. Calculate the percentage of lead (II) nitrate in the sample.
2 Pb(NO3 )2 
 2 PbO + 4 NO2 + O2
Number of moles of O2 formed = .......................................
Number of moles of Pb(NO3)2 in the sample = .......................................
Mass of one mole of Pb(NO3)2 = 331 g
Mass of lead(II) nitrate in the sample = ....................................... g
Percentage of lead(II) nitrate in sample = ..................................... [4]
3) Nov 2010 [31] Q (8_b)
(b) 6.0 g of cobalt (II) carbonate was added to 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid,
concentration 2.0 mol/dm3.
Calculate the maximum yield of cobalt(II) chloride-6-water and show that the
cobalt(II) carbonate was in excess.
Maximum yield
Number of moles of HCl used = .........................
Number of moles of CoCl2 formed = .........................
Number of moles of CoCl 2.6H2O formed = .........................
Mass of one mole of CoCl2.6H2O = 238 g
Maximum yield of CoCl2.6H2O = ......................... g [4]
To show that cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess
Number of moles of HCl used = ......................... (use value from above)
Mass of one mole of CoCO3 = 119 g
Number of moles of CoCO3 in 6.0 g of cobalt(II) carbonate = ..................... [1]
Explain why cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess ...................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
4) Nov 2010 [32] Q (7_d)
(d) 20.0 cm3 of sulfuric acid, concentration 0.30 mol / dm3, was added to 40
cm3 of sodium hydroxide, concentration 0.20 mol /dm3.
2NaOH + H2SO4 
→ Na2SO4 + 2H2O
(i) How many moles of H2SO4 were added? .............................. [1]
(ii) How many moles of NaOH were used? .............................. [1]
(iii) Which reagent is in excess? Give a reason for your choice.
reagent in excess .......................................................................................... [1]
reason ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Is the pH of the final mixture less than 7, equal to 7 or more than 7?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
5) Nov 2010 [33] Q (5_b, i, ii, iii)
(b) Maleic acid is an unsaturated acid. 5.8 g of this acid contained 2.4 g of
carbon, 0.2 g of hydrogen and 3.2 g of oxygen.
(i) How do you know that the acid contained only carbon, hydrogen and oxygen?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the empirical formula of maleic acid.
Number of moles of carbon atoms = ................................
Number of moles of hydrogen atoms = ................................
Number of moles of oxygen atoms = ................................
The empirical formula is ................................................................................ [3]
(iii) The mass of one mole of maleic acid is 116 g. What is its molecular formula?
....................................................................................................................... [2]
6) May 2011 [31] Q (5_d, iii)
(d) 20.0 cm3 of aqueous sodium hydroxide, 2.00 mol/dm3, was placed in a
beaker. The temperature of the alkali was measured and 1.0 cm3 portions of
hydroiodic were added. After each addition the temperature of the mixture
was measured. Typical results as shown on the graph
NaOH(aq) + HI(aq) 
 NaI(aq) + H2O(l)
(iii) In another experiment, it was shown that 15.0 cm3 of the acid neutralized
20.0 cm3 of aqueous sodium hydroxide, 1.00 mol/dm3. Calculate the
concentration of the acid
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………….………………[2]
7) June 2011 [31] Q (6_c ii)

(c) Butanol reacts with ethanoic acid to form a liquid, X which has the sweet
smell of bananas. Its empirical formula is C3H6O and its Mr is 116
(ii) Give the molecular formula of liquid X
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………….………………[2]
8) May 2011 [32] Q (7_b i)

(b) Phosphorus trichloride reacts with water to form two acids.
(i) Balance the equation for this reaction.
PCl3 + ........ H2O 
→ ....... HCl + H3PO3 [1]
9) May 2011 [32] Q (8_a iii, iv)

8 Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain only carbon and hydrogen.
(a) 20 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon was burned in 120 cm3 of oxygen, which
is in excess. After cooling, the volume of the gases remaining was 90 cm3.
Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to remove carbon dioxide, 30 cm3 of
oxygen remained. All volumes were measured at r.t.p.
(iii) Complete the following.
volume of gaseous hydrocarbon = ......................cm3
volume of oxygen used = ....................................cm3
volume of carbon dioxide formed = .....................cm3 [2]
(iv) Use the above volume ratio to find the mole ratio in the equation below
and hence find the formula of the hydrocarbon.
....... CxHy(g) + ....... O2(g) 
→ ....... CO2(g) + ...... H2O(l)
hydrocarbon formula = ................................................ [2]
10) Nov 2011 [31] Q (7_c)
(c) There are three possible equations for the thermal decomposition of
sodium hydrogencarbonate.
2NaHCO3(s) → Na2O(s) + 2CO2(g) + H2O(g) equation 1
NaHCO3(s) → NaOH(s) + CO2(g) equation 2
2NaHCO3(s) → Na2CO3(s) + CO2(g) + H2O(g) equation 3
The following experiment was carried out to determine which one of the above
is the correct equation.
A known mass of sodium hydrogencarbonate was heated for ten minutes. It
was then allowed to cool and weighed.
Results
Mass of sodium hydrogencarbonate = 3.36 g
Mass of the residue = 2.12 g
Calculation
Mr for NaHCO3 = 84 g; Mr for Na2O = 62 g; Mr for NaOH = 40 g
Mr for Na2CO3 = 106 g
(i) Number of moles of NaHCO3 used = ............... [1]
(ii) If residue is Na2O, number of moles of Na2O = ...............
If residue is NaOH, number of moles of NaOH = ...............
If residue is Na2CO3, number of moles of Na2CO3 = ............... [2]
(iii) Use the number of moles calculated in (i) and (ii) to decide which one of
the three equations is correct. Explain your choice.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
11) Nov 2011 [32] Q (6_c)

(c) Insoluble salts are made by precipitation. An equation for the preparation
of barium sulfate is given below.
BaCl2(aq) + MgSO4(aq) 
→ BaSO4(s) + MgCl2(aq)
This reaction can be used to find x in the formula for hydrated magnesium
sulfate MgSO4.xH2O.
A known mass of hydrated magnesium sulfate, MgSO4.xH2O, was dissolved
in water.
Excess aqueous barium chloride was added. The precipitate of barium sulfate
was filtered, washed and dried. Finally it was weighed.
Mass of hydrated magnesium sulfate = 1.476 g
Mass of barium sulfate formed = 1.398 g
The mass of one mole of BaSO4 = 233 g
The number of moles of BaSO4 formed = ............... [1]
The number of moles of MgSO4.xH2O = ............... [1]
The mass of one mole of MgSO4.xH2O = ............... g [1]
The mass of one mole of MgSO4 = 120 g
The mass of xH2O in one mole of MgSO4.xH2O = ............... [1]
x = ............... [1]
12) Nov 2011 [32] Q (7_c)
(c) An analysis of the compound, Pb(C2H5)n , showed that 0.026 moles of Pb
was combined with 0.104 moles of C2H5 groups.
What is the value of n? Show how you arrived at your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
13) Nov 2011 [33] Q (7_a)
7 The alkenes are a series of unsaturated hydrocarbons. They have the
general molecular formula CnH2n.
(a) Deduce the molecular formula of an alkene which has a relative molecular
mass of 126. Show your working.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
14) May 2012 [31] Q (8_b)

b) A sample of rust had the following composition
51.85 g of iron 22.22 g of oxygen 16.67 g of water
Calculate the following and then write the formula for this sample of rust
number of moles of iron atoms, Fe =…………………….…….. [1]
number of moles of oxygen atoms, O = …………………..…… [1]
number of moles of water molecules, H2O = …………...…….. [1]
simplest mole ratio Fe : O : H2O is ….... : ….... : …..…… [1]
formula for this sample of rust is ………………………..……… [1]
15) May 2012 [32] Q (7_e)
(e) 0.01 moles of an alkene needed 2.4 g of oxygen for complete combustion.
2.2 g of carbon dioxide were formed. Determine the following mole ratio.
moles of alkene : moles of O2 : moles of CO2
………………. …………….. ……………….
………………. ………………. ……………….
………………. ………………. ……………….
From this ratio determine the formula of the alkene.

....................................................................................................................... [3]
Write an equation for the complete combustion of this alkene.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
16) Nov 2012 [31] Q (2_c)
(c) Fluorine, the most reactive halogen, forms compounds with the other
halogens. It forms two compounds with bromine.
Deduce their formulae from the following information.
compound 1
The mass of one mole of this compound is 137 g.
Its formula is ................................. [1]
compound 2
0.02 moles of this compound contain 0.02 moles of bromine atoms and 0.1
moles of fluorine atoms.
Its formula is ................................. [1]
17) Nov 2012 [31] Q (7_c)

Strontium chloride-6-water can be made from the insoluble compound,
strontium carbonate, by the following reactions.
SrCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ SrCl2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)
SrCl2(aq) + 6H2O(l) 
→ SrCl2.6H2O(s)
(c) In the above experiment, 50.0 cm3 of hydrochloric acid of concentration
2.0 mol / dm3 was used. 6.4 g of SrCl2.6H2O was made.
Calculate the percentage yield.
number of moles of HCl used = ............................
number of moles of SrCl2.6H2O which could be formed = ............................
mass of one mole of SrCl2.6H2O is 267 g
theoretical yield of SrCl2.6H2O = ............................g
percentage yield = ............................% [4]
18) Nov 2012 [32] Q (5_d)
5 The food additive E220 is sulfur dioxide. It is a preservative for a variety of
foods and drinks
(d) Sulfur dioxide can also be made by the reaction between a sulfite and an
acid.
Na2SO3 + 2HCl 
→ 2NaCl + SO2 + H2O
Excess hydrochloric acid was added to 3.15 g of sodium sulfite. Calculate the
maximum volume, measured at r.t.p., of sulfur dioxide which could be formed.
The mass of one mole of Na2SO3 is 126 g.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
19) Nov 2012 [32] Q (7_a, i, ii)
methanol, CH3OH.
(a) (i) Give the general formula of the alcohols.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The mass of one mole of an alcohol is 116 g. What is its formula?
Show your reasoning.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
20) Nov 2012 [33] Q (5_c)

(c) An organic compound has a molecular formula C6H8O4. It is an
unsaturated carboxylic acid. One mole of the compound reacts with two moles
of sodium hydroxide.
(i) Explain the phrase molecular formula.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
21) Nov 2012 [33] Q (6_c)
(b) Another hydride of arsenic has the composition below.
arsenic 97.4 % hydrogen 2.6 %
(i) Calculate the empirical formula of this hydride from the above data.
Show your working.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of one mole of this hydride is 154 g. What is its molecular
formula?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Deduce the structural formula of this hydride.
[1]
22) May 2013 [31] Q (7_b, c)
7 The hydroxides of the Group I metals are soluble in water. Most other metal
hydroxides are insoluble in water.
(b) The concentration of the hydrochloric acid was 2.20 mol / dm3. The
volume of acid needed to neutralise the 25.0 cm3 of lithium hydroxide was
20.0 cm3. Calculate the concentration of the aqueous lithium hydroxide.
LiOH + HCl 
→ LiCl + H2O
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Lithium chloride forms three hydrates. They are LiCl.H2O, LiCl.2H2O and
LiCl.3H2O.
Which one of these three hydrates contains 45.9 % of water?
Show how you arrived at your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
23) May 2013 [32] Q (8_a, b, c)
8 (a) Define the following
(i) the mole
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the Avogadro constant
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which two of the following contain the same number of molecules?
Show how you arrived at your answer.
2.0 g of methane, CH4
8.0 g of oxygen, O2
2.0 g of ozone, O3
8.0 g of sulfur dioxide, SO2
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) 4.8 g of calcium is added to 3.6 g of water. The following reaction occurs.
Ca + 2H2O 
→ Ca(OH)2 + H2
(i) the number of moles of Ca = ....................
the number of moles of H2O = .................... [1]
(ii) Which reagent is in excess? Explain your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Calculate the mass of the reagent named in (ii) which remained at the
end of the experiment.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
24) May 2013 [33] Q (8_d)

(d) 20 cm3 of a hydrocarbon was burnt in 175 cm3 of oxygen. After cooling,
the volume of the remaining gases was 125 cm3. The addition of aqueous
sodium hydroxide removed carbon dioxide leaving 25 cm3 of unreacted
oxygen.
(i) volume of oxygen used = ............ cm3 [1]
(ii) volume of carbon dioxide formed = ............ cm3 [1]
(iii) Deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon and the balanced equation for the
reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
25) Nov 2013 [31] Q (4_c)
4 20.0 g of small lumps of calcium carbonate and 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid,
concentration 2.0 mol / dm3, were placed in a flask on a top pan balance. The
mass of the flask and contents was recorded every minute.
(d) Calculate the maximum mass of carbon dioxide given off when 20.0 g of
small lumps of calcium carbonate react with 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid,
concentration 2.0 mol / dm3.
CaCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ CaCl2(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
number of moles of HCl used =

…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
mass of carbon dioxide = ................. g [4]
26) Nov 2013 [31] Q (6_c)

(c) Basic lead(II) carbonate has a formula of the type xPbCO3.yPb(OH)2
where x and y are whole numbers.
Determine x and y from the following information.
PbCO3 
→ PbO + CO2
Pb(OH)2 
→ n PbO + H2O
When heated, the basic lead(II) carbonate gave 2.112 g of carbon dioxide and
0.432 g of water.
Mass of one mole of CO2 = 44 g
Mass of one mole of H2O = 18 g
Number of moles of CO2 formed = ..................... [1]
Number of moles of H2O formed = ..................... [1]
x = ..................... and y = .....................
Formula of basic lead(II) carbonate is ........................................................... [1]
27) Nov 2013 [32] Q (5_c, ii, iii)
5 Silver(I) chromate(VI) is an insoluble salt. It is prepared by precipitation.
20 cm3 of aqueous silver(I) nitrate, concentration 0.2 mol/dm3, was mixed with
20 cm3 of aqueous potassium chromate(VI), concentration 0.1 mol / dm3. After
stirring, the mixture was filtered. The precipitate was washed several times
with distilled water. The precipitate was then left in a warm oven for several
hours
2AgNO3(aq) + K 2CrO4(aq) 
→ Ag2CrO4(s) + 2KNO3(aq)
(ii) What mass of silver(I) nitrate is needed to prepare 100 cm3 of silver(I)
nitrate solution, concentration 0.2 mol / dm3?
The mass of one mole of AgNO3 is 170 g.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) What is the maximum mass of silver(I) chromate(VI) which could be
obtained from 20 cm3 of aqueous silver(I) nitrate, concentration 0.2 mol/dm3?
number of moles of AgNO3 used = ..................... [1]
number of moles of Ag2CrO4 formed = ..................... [1]
mass of one mole of Ag2CrO4 = 332 g
mass of Ag2CrO4 formed = ..................... g [1]
28) Nov 2013 [33] Q (6_d, i)

(d) Alcohols can be made by fermentation and from petroleum.
(i) Ethanol is made from sugars by fermentation.
C6H12O6 
→ 2C2H5OH + 2CO2
The mass of one mole of glucose, C6H12O6, is 180 g.
Calculate the maximum mass of ethanol which could be obtained from 72 g of
glucose.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
29) May 2014 [31] Q (6_d)
(d) In the first experiment, the maximum volume of oxygen produced was 96
cm3 measured at r.t.p. Calculate the concentration of the aqueous hydrogen
peroxide in mol / dm3.
2 H2O2(aq) 
→ 2 H2O(l) + O2(g)
number of moles of O2 formed = ................................................................... [1]

number of moles of H2O2 in 40 cm3 of solution = .......................................... [1]
concentration of the aqueous hydrogen peroxide in mol / dm3 = ….............. [1]
30) May 2014 [32] Q (7_b, c)
(b) Using 25.0 cm3 of aqueous lithium hydroxide, concentration 2.48 mol /
dm3, 2.20 g of hydrated lithium sulfate was obtained.
Calculate the percentage yield, giving your answer to one decimal place.
2LiOH + H2SO4 
→ Li2SO4 + 2H2O
Li2SO4 + H2O 
→ Li2SO4 .H2O
Number of moles of LiOH used = .......................
Number of moles of Li2SO4.H2O which could be formed = .......................
Mass of one mole of Li2SO4.H2O = 128 g
Maximum yield of Li2SO4.H2O = ....................... g
Percentage yield = .......................%
[4]
(c) An experiment was carried out to show that the formula of the hydrated
salt is Li2SO4.H2O.
A sample of the hydrated salt was weighed and its mass recorded. It was then
heated and the anhydrous salt was weighed. This procedure was repeated
until two consecutive masses were the same. This procedure is called
‘heating to constant mass’.
(i) What is the reason for heating to constant mass?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The mass of the hydrated salt is m1 and the mass of the anhydrous salt is
m2. Explain how you could show that the hydrated salt has one mole of water
of crystallisation per mole of the anhydrous salt.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
31) May 2014 [33] Q (6_c)
(c) The complete combustion of hydrocarbons produces carbon dioxide and
water only.
(i) Write the equation for the complete combustion of nonane, C9H20.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) 20 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon was mixed with an excess of oxygen,
200 cm3. The mixture was ignited. After cooling, 40 cm3 of oxygen and 100
cm3 of carbon dioxide remained. Deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon and
the equation for its combustion. All volumes were measured at r.t.p..
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
32) Nov 2014 [31] Q (6_a,ii)
6 Esters, polyesters and fats all contain the ester linkage.
(a) Esters can be made from alcohols and carboxylic acids. For example, the
ester ethyl ethanoate can be made by the following reaction.
CH3COOH + CH3CH2OH 
→ CH3COOCH2CH3 + H2O
(ii) 6.0 g of ethanoic acid, Mr = 60, was reacted with 5.5 g of ethanol, Mr = 46.
Determine which is the limiting reagent and the maximum yield of ethyl
ethanoate, Mr = 88.
number of moles of ethanoic acid = .............................................................. [1]
number of moles of ethanol = ....................................................................... [1]
the limiting reagent is .................................................................................... [1]
number of moles of ethyl ethanoate formed = .............................................. [1]
maximum yield of ethyl ethanoate = ............................................................. [1]
33) Nov 2014 [32] Q (6_b,iii)

(b) A group of naturally occurring minerals have the formula of the type
FeSO4.xH2O where x is 1, 4, 5, 6 or 7. The most common of these minerals is
iron(II) sulfate-7-water.
(iii) A mineral of the type FeSO4.xH2O contains 37.2% of water.
Complete the calculation to determine x.
mass of one mole of H2O = 18 g
mass of water in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = 37.2 g
number of moles of H2O in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = .................
mass of FeSO4 in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = ................. g
mass of one mole of FeSO4 = 152 g
number of moles of FeSO4 in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = .................
x = ................. [4]
34) Nov 2014 [33] Q (2_b)
(b) Compound X is a hydrocarbon. It contains 85.7% of carbon. The mass of
one mole of X is 84 g.
(i) What is the percentage of hydrogen in the compound?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the empirical formula of X. Show your working.
empirical formula = ................................[3]

(iii) What is the molecular formula of compound X?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
35) Nov 2014 [33] Q (8_c)
(c) 6.31 g of cobalt(II) chloride-6-water crystals were obtained. Calculate the
percentage yield to 1 decimal place.
CoCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ CoCl2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)
number of moles of HCl in 50 cm3 of acid, concentration 2.2 mol/dm3 = ...........
maximum number of moles of CoCl2.6H2O which could be formed = ..............
mass of 1 mole of CoCl2.6H2O = 238 g
maximum yield of CoCl2.6H2O = .............. g
percentage yield = ..............%
36) May 2015 [31] Q (3_d)

(d) Calculate the maximum mass of zinc which will react with 50 cm3 of
hydrochloric acid, of concentration 2.0 mol / dm3.
Zn + 2HCl 
→ ZnCl2 + H2
Show your working.
[3]
37) May 2015 [31] Q (5_b)
(b) The halogens form interhalogen compounds. These are compounds which
contain two different halogens.
Deduce the formula of the compound which has the composition 0.013 moles
of iodine atoms and 0.065 moles of fluorine atoms.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
38) May 2015 [32] Q (6_c, ii, iii)
(c) The equation for the decomposition of copper(II) nitrate is given below.
2 Cu(NO3 )2 
→ 2 CuO + 4 NO2 + O2
(ii) Copper(II) nitrate forms a series of hydrates with the formula
Cu(NO3)2.xH2O.
All these hydrates decompose to form copper(II) oxide.
1 mole of Cu(NO3)2.xH2O forms 1 mole of CuO.
What is meant by 1 mole of a substance?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) 7.26 g of a hydrate, Cu(NO3)2.xH2O, formed 2.4 g copper(II) oxide.
number of moles of CuO formed = ......................
number of moles of Cu(NO3)2.xH2O in 7.26 g = ......................
mass of 1 mole of Cu(NO3)2.xH2O = ...................... g
mass of 1 mole of Cu(NO3)2 is 188 g
the value of x in this hydrate = ...................... [4]
39) May 2015 [33] Q (3_c)

3 Quicklime, which is calcium oxide, is made by heating limestone in a
furnace.
 CaO(s) + CO2(g)
CaCO3(s) 
The reaction does not come to equilibrium.
(c) Calculate the maximum mass of calcium oxide which could be made from
12.5 tonnes of calcium carbonate. 1 tonne = 1 × 106 g.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
40) May 2015 [33] Q (5_c)

(c) The table below shows the results obtained by reducing the copper(II)
oxide produced by different methods to copper.
(i) Complete the table.
[2]
(ii) One of the samples of copper(II) oxide is impure.
Identify this sample and suggest an explanation why the percentage of copper
in this sample is bigger than in the other three samples.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
41) Nov 2015 [31] Q (5_a)

5 (a) A compound, X, contains 55.85% carbon, 6.97% hydrogen and 37.18%
oxygen.
(i) How does this prove that compound X contains only carbon, hydrogen and
oxygen?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use the above percentages to calculate the empirical formula of
compound X.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The Mr of X is 86.
What is its molecular formula?
....................................................................................................................... [2]
42) Nov 2015 [32] Q (4_d)
(d) Propanol reacts with methanoic acid to form the ester propyl methanoate.
CH3CH2CH2OH + HCOOH 
→ HCOOCH2CH2CH3 + H2O
4.0 g of methanoic acid was reacted with 6.0 g of propanol.
(i) Calculate the Mr of methanoic acid = ....................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the Mr of propanol = ................................................................ [1]
(iii) Determine which one is the limiting reagent. Show your reasoning.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Calculate the maximum yield in grams of propyl methanoate, Mr = 88.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
43) Nov 2015 [33] Q (7_a)

7 Two salts can be made from potassium hydroxide and sulfuric acid. They
are potassium sulfate, K2SO4, and the acid salt potassium hydrogen sulfate,
KHSO4. They are both made by titration.
(a) 25.0 cm3 of potassium hydroxide, concentration 2.53 mol / dm3, was
neutralised by 28.2 cm3 of dilute sulfuric acid.
2KOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) 
→ K2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)
Calculate the concentration of the sulfuric acid.
number of moles of KOH used = ............................
number of moles of H2SO4 needed to neutralise the KOH = ............................
concentration of dilute sulfuric acid = ............................ mol / dm3
[3]
44) May 2016 [41] Q (2_a)
2 Period 3 contains the elements sodium to argon. This question asks about
the chemistry of each of the Period 3 elements or their compounds.
(a) Sodium nitrate is a white crystalline solid. When heated it melts and the
following reaction occurs.
2NaNO3(l) 
→ 2NaNO2(l) + O2(g)
A 3.40 g sample of sodium nitrate is heated.

Calculate the
• number of moles of NaNO3 used,
.................................. mol
• number of moles of O2 formed,
.................................. mol
3
• volume of O2 formed, in dm (measured at r.t.p.).
.................................. dm3 [3]

45) May 2016 [42] Q (5_a)
5 (a) Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain hydrogen and carbon only.
• 10 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon, CxHy, are burned in 100 cm3 of
oxygen, which is an excess of oxygen.
• After cooling to room temperature and pressure, there is 25 cm3 of
unreacted oxygen, 50 cm3 of carbon dioxide and some liquid water.
All volumes are measured under the same conditions of temperature and
pressure.
(i) What is meant by an excess of oxygen?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What was the volume of oxygen that reacted with the hydrocarbon?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the table below to express the smallest whole number ratio of
volume of
volume of volume of
: : carbon dioxide
hydrocarbon reacted oxygen reacted
produced
volume of
volume of volume of
carbon dioxide
produced
smallest whole
number ratio of
volumes
[1]
(iv) Use your answer to (a)(iii) to find the mole ratio in the equation below.
Complete the equation and deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon.
.........C xHy(g) + .........O2(g) 
→ .........CO2(g) + .........H2O(l)
formula of hydrocarbon = ........................................... [2]
46) May 2016 [43] Q (5)

5 Dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with sodium carbonate solution.
2HCl(aq) + Na2CO3(aq) 
→ 2NaCl(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
(a) Explain why effervescence is seen during the reaction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Dilute hydrochloric acid was titrated with sodium carbonate solution.
• 10.0 cm3 of 0.100 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid were placed in a conical flask.
• A few drops of methyl orange indicator were added to the dilute hydrochloric
acid.
• The mixture was titrated with sodium carbonate solution.
• 16.2 cm3 of sodium carbonate solution were required to react completely
with the acid.
(i) What colour would the methyl orange indicator be in the hydrochloric acid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate how many moles of hydrochloric acid were used.
............................ mol [1]

(iii) Use your answer to (b)(ii) and the equation for the reaction to calculate
the number of moles of sodium carbonate that reacted.
............................ mol [1]

(iv) Use your answer to (b)(iii) to calculate the concentration of the sodium
carbonate solution in mol / dm3.
............................ mol / dm3 [2]
(c) In another experiment, 0.020 mol of sodium carbonate were reacted with
excess hydrochloric acid.
Calculate the maximum volume (at r.t.p.) of carbon dioxide gas that could be
made in this reaction.
............................ dm3 [3]

47) Nov 2016 [41] Q (3_e, ii, iii)
(e) Isoprene is a naturally occurring hydrocarbon.
(ii) A sample of isoprene had the following composition by mass: C, 88.24%;
H, 11.76%.
Calculate the empirical formula of isoprene. Show all your working.
empirical formula = .............................. [3]

(iii) What additional information would be required to calculate the molecular
formula of isoprene?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
48) Nov 2016 [41] Q (7)

7 Calcium chloride can be made by reacting calcium carbonate with
hydrochloric acid.
An excess of calcium carbonate was added to 50.0 cm3 of 0.500 mol / dm3
hydrochloric acid. The solution was filtered to remove the excess calcium
carbonate.
(a) How many moles of HCl were used in this reaction?
..................................... mol [2]

(b) Deduce the number of moles of carbon dioxide gas made in this reaction.
..................................... mol [1]

(c) Calculate the mass of carbon dioxide made in this reaction.
........................................ g [2]
3
(d) Calculate the volume, in dm , of carbon dioxide made in this reaction at
room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
.................................... dm3 [1]
49) Nov 2016 [42] Q (5_a, e, i)

5 Chlorine, bromine and iodine are halogens.
(a) Chlorine can be made in the laboratory by heating manganese(IV) oxide
with concentrated hydrochloric acid.
MnO2(s) + 4HCl(aq) 
→ MnCl2(aq) + 2H2O(l) + Cl2(g)
Calculate the volume of 8.00 mol / dm3 HCl(aq) needed to react with 3.48 g of
MnO2.
• moles of MnO2 used
................................ mol
• moles of HCl needed
................................ mol
• volume of HCl needed
................................ cm3
[4]
(e) Iodine forms an oxide which has the composition by mass: I, 76.0%; O,
24.0%.
(i) Use this information to determine the empirical formula of this oxide of
iodine.
empirical formula ................................. [3]
50) Nov 2016 [43] Q (3_a, b)

3 When lead(II) nitrate is heated, two gases are given off and solid lead(II)
oxide remains.
The equation for the reaction is shown.
2Pb(NO3)2(s) 
→ 2PbO(s) + 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
(a) Calculate the Mr of lead(II) nitrate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) 6.62 g of lead(II) nitrate are heated until there is no further change in
mass.
(i) Calculate the mass of lead(II) oxide produced.
........................... g [2]
(ii) Calculate the volume of oxygen, O2, produced at room temperature and
pressure (r.t.p.).
........................... dm3 [2]

51) May 2017 [41] Q (3_b)
(b) Magnesium sulfate crystals are hydrated. Another student heated some
hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals in a crucible and obtained the following
results.
mass of hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals = 4.92 g
mass of water removed = 2.52 g
(i) Calculate the number of moles of water removed.
moles of water = ............................. mol [1]
(ii) Calculate the number of moles of anhydrous magnesium sulfate remaining

in the crucible.
The Mr of anhydrous magnesium sulfate is 120.
moles of anhydrous magnesium sulfate = ........................ mol [1]

(iii) Calculate the ratio of moles of anhydrous magnesium sulfate : moles of
water. Give your answer as whole numbers.
ratio = ................ : ................ [1]

(iv) Suggest the formula of hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals.
formula of hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals = ........................... [2]

52) May 2017 [41] Q (5_c)
(c) The total volume of gas collected was 180 cm3 at room temperature and
pressure.
Calculate the mass, in grams, of barium carbonate used.
BaCO3 + 2HCl 
→ BaCl2 + H2O + CO2
mass of barium carbonate = ............................. g [3]
53) May 2017 [42] Q (5_b, ii, iii, iv)

(b) A sample of vanadium chloride was weighed and dissolved in water. An
excess of aqueous silver nitrate, acidified with dilute nitric acid, was added. A
precipitate of silver chloride was formed. The ionic equation for this reaction is
shown.
Ag+(aq) + Cl–(aq) 
→ AgCl(s)
The mass of silver chloride formed was 2.87 g.
(ii) The relative formula mass of silver chloride, AgCl, is 143.5.
Calculate the number of moles in 2.87 g of AgCl.
moles of AgCl = .............................. mol [1]

(iii) Use your answer to (b)(ii) and the ionic equation to deduce the number of
moles of chloride ions, Cl–, that produced 2.87 g of AgCl.
moles of Cl– = .............................. mol [1]

(iv) The amount of vanadium chloride in the sample was 0.01 moles.
Use this and your answer to (b)(iii) to deduce the whole number ratio of
moles of vanadium chloride : moles of chloride ions.
Deduce the formula of vanadium chloride.
moles of vanadium chloride : moles of chloride ions ................... : ...................
formula of vanadium chloride .............................................................................
[2]
54) May 2017 [43] Q (6_c)
(c) Barium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
BaCO3 + 2HCl 
→ BaCl2 + CO2 + H2O
9.85 g of barium carbonate were added to 250 cm3 of 1.00 mol / dm3
hydrochloric acid. This is an excess of hydrochloric acid.
(i) Calculate how many moles of barium carbonate were used in this
experiment.
moles of barium carbonate = ............................ mol [2]

(ii) Deduce how many moles of carbon dioxide were made when all the
barium carbonate had reacted.
moles of carbon dioxide = ............................ mol [1]

(iii) Calculate the volume of carbon dioxide formed in (c)(ii) at room
temperature and pressure, in dm3.
volume of carbon dioxide = ............................ dm3 [1]

(iv) Calculate how many moles of hydrochloric acid there were in excess.
excess moles of hydrochloric acid = ............................ mol [2]
55) Nov 2017 [41] Q (7_b, c)

7 Copper(II) oxide reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
CuO(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ CuCl2(aq) + H2O(l)
6.00 g of copper(II) oxide were added to 50.0 cm3 of 1.00 mol / dm3
hydrochloric acid. This was an excess of copper(II) oxide.
(b) (i) Calculate the number of moles of copper(II) oxide added to the
hydrochloric acid.
moles of copper(II) oxide = ............................. mol [2]

(ii) Calculate the number of moles of hydrochloric acid used.
moles of hydrochloric acid = ............................. mol [1]

(iii) Calculate the mass of copper(II) oxide that did not react.
mass of copper(II) oxide that did not react = ............................. g [2]

(c) Crystals of hydrated copper(II) chloride were obtained from the solution at
the end of the reaction.
The crystals had the following composition by mass: Cl, 41.52%; Cu, 37.43%;
H, 2.34%; O, 18.71%.
Calculate the empirical formula of the crystals.
empirical formula = ............................. [2]
56) May 2018 [41] Q (4)

4 This question is about masses, volumes and moles.
(a) Which term is defined by the following statement?
The average mass of naturally occurring atoms of an element
on a scale where the 12C atom has a mass of exactly 12 units.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Butane, C4H10, has a relative molecular mass of 58.
Potassium fluoride, KF, has a relative formula mass of 58.
Explain why the term relative molecular mass can be used for butane but
cannot be used for potassium fluoride.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A 0.095 g sample of gaseous element Y occupies 60.0 cm3 at room
temperature and pressure.
● Determine the number of moles of element Y in 60.0 cm3.
moles of element Y = ............................. mol

● Calculate the relative molecular mass of element Y and hence suggest the
identity of element Y.
relative molecular mass = .............................

identity of element Y = .............................
[3]
(d) A 1.68 g sample of phosphorus was burned and formed 3.87 g of an oxide
of phosphorus.
Calculate the empirical formula of this oxide of phosphorus.
empirical formula = ............................. [4]

(e) Another oxide of phosphorus has the empirical formula P2O3.
One molecule of this oxide of phosphorus contains four atoms of phosphorus.
Calculate the mass of one mole of this oxide of phosphorus.
mass = ............................. g [2]

57) May 2018 [42] Q (7_a, b)
7 Many organic compounds, such as alcohols, carboxylic acids and esters,
contain the elements carbon, hydrogen and oxygen only.
(a) Compound R has the following composition by mass: C, 60.00%; H,
13.33%; O, 26.67%.
Calculate the empirical formula of compound R.
(b) Compound S has the empirical formula C2H4O and a relative molecular
mass of 88.
Calculate the molecular formula of compound S.
molecular formula = .............................. [2]

58) May 2018 [43] Q (5_a)
5 (a) Nickel(II) iodide crystals are hydrated. A sample of hydrated nickel(II)
iodide crystals has the following composition by mass: Ni, 14.01%; I, 60.33%;
H, 2.85%; O, 22.81%.
Calculate the empirical formula of the hydrated nickel(II) iodide crystals.

59) May 2018 [43] Q (6)
6 Calcium chlorate(V), Ca(ClO3)2, is made by reacting calcium hydroxide with
chlorine gas.
6Ca(OH)2 + 6Cl2 
→ Ca(ClO3)2 + 5CaCl2 + 6H2O
(a) 8.88 g of calcium hydroxide and 7200 cm3 of chlorine gas are mixed
together.
(i) How many moles is 8.88 g of calcium hydroxide?
.............................. mol [2]
(ii) How many moles of chlorine gas is 7200 cm3?
.............................. mol [1]

(iii) What is the maximum number of moles of calcium chlorate(V) that can
be made from 8.88 g of calcium hydroxide and 7200 cm3 of chlorine gas?
.............................. mol [1]

(iv) What is the maximum mass of calcium chlorate(V) that can be made from
8.88 g of calcium hydroxide and 7200 cm3 of chlorine gas?
.............................. g [2]
The experiment is repeated using different amounts of calcium hydroxide and
chlorine gas.
The maximum mass of calcium chlorate(V) that can be made in the
experiment is 4.84 g.
(v) The actual mass of calcium chlorate(V) made in the experiment is 3.63 g.
Calculate the percentage yield.
percentage yield = .............................. % [1]
109 5 – Electrochemistry Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 Q [31] (7_c)

7 Titanium is a transition element. It is isolated by the following reactions.
titanium ore → titanium(IV)oxide → titanium(IV)chloride → titanium
TiO2 TiCl4 Ti
(c) Explain why the change, titanium(IV) chloride to titanium, is reduction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
2) May 2010 Q [32] (3_a, iii)
3 The following are examples of redox reactions.
(a) Bromine water was added to aqueous sodium sulfide.
2− −
Br2(aq) + S(aq) 
→ 2Br(aq) + S(s)
(iii) Explain, in terms of electron transfer, why bromine is the oxidant

(oxidising agent) in this reaction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
3) May 2010 [32] Q (7)
7 Aluminium was first isolated in 1827 using sodium
AlCl3 + 3 Na 
→ Al + 3 NaCl
Aluminium, obtained by this method, was more expensive than gold.
(a) Suggest an explanation why aluminium was so expensive.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The modern method for extracting aluminium is the electrolysis of a molten
electrolyte, aluminium oxide dissolved in cryolite. The aluminium oxide
decomposes.
2 Al2O3 
 4 Al + 3 O2
Both electrodes are made of carbon.
(i) Give two reasons why the oxide is dissolved in cryolite.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Complete the ionic equation for the reaction at the anode.
........ O2 
 O2 + ........ e
[2]

(iii) Why do the carbon anodes need to be replaced frequently?

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The electrolysis of a molten electrolyte is one method of extracting a metal
from its ore.
Other methods are the electrolysis of an aqueous solution and the reduction
of the oxide by carbon. Explain why these last two methods cannot be used to
extract aluminium.
electrolysis of an aqueous solution .........................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
using carbon ......................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
4) Nov 2010 [31] Q (2_c, iii)
2 About 4000 years ago the Bronze Age started in Britain. Bronze is an alloy
of copper and tin
(iii) Copper oxide is reduced to copper which is then refined by electrolysis.
Label the diagram of the apparatus which could be used to refine copper.
5) Nov 2010 [32] Q (4_b)

(b) Chromium is used to electroplate steel objects. The diagram shows how
this could be done.

(i) Give two reasons why steel objects are plated with chromium.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The formula of the chromium(III) ion is Cr3+ and of the sulfate ion is SO24
Give the formula of chromium(III) sulfate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write the equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) A colourless gas, which relights a glowing splint, is formed at the positive
electrode (anode). Name this gas.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) During electrolysis, it is necessary to add more chromium(III) sulfate but
during copper-plating using a copper anode, it is not necessary to add more
copper(II) sulfate. Explain.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
6) Nov 2010 [33] Q (4_a)
4 The electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride, between inert
electrodes, is used to make four important chemicals.
hydrogen
chlorine
sodium hydroxide
sodium chlorate(I)
(a) The ions present in the electrolyte are Na+, H+, Cl – and OH–.
(i) Hydrogen ions are discharged at the negative electrode (cathode).
Write an equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The hydrogen ions are from the water.
 H+
H2O  + OH−
Suggest an explanation why the concentration of hydroxide ions increases.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) When a dilute solution of sodium chloride is used, chlorine is not formed
at the positive electrode (anode), a different gas is produced. Name this gas.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State an example of an inert electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

7) May 2011 [31] Q (5_a, b)

Hydroiodic acid HI(aq) is a strong acid, its salts are iodides
a) It has the reactions of a typical strong acid. Complete the following
equations
i) ........Li  ........HI 
 ..............  .............. [1]
Zinc  hydroiodic 
 .....................  .....................  ..............
ii) [2]
carbonate acid .....................  .....................
iii) MgO  ........HI 
 ..............  .............. [1]
b) two of the reactions in (a) are acid/base and one is redox. Which one is
redox? Explain your choice
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
8) May 2011 [32] Q (2_b)
(b) Aqueous tin(II) sulfate is electrolysed using carbon electrodes. This
electrolysis is similar to that of aqueous copper(II) sulfate using carbon
electrodes.
(i) What is the product at the negative electrode (cathode)?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name the acid formed in this electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
9) Nov 2011 [31] Q (3_a, b)
3 Aluminium is extracted by the electrolysis of a molten mixture of alumina,
which is aluminium oxide, and cryolite.

(a) (i) Alumina is obtained from the main ore of aluminium.

Name this ore.
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why it is necessary to use a mixture, alumina and cryolite, rather
than just alumina.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) Copper can be extracted by the electrolysis of an aqueous solution.
Suggest why the electrolysis of an aqueous solution cannot be used to extract
aluminium.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The ions which are involved in the electrolysis are Al3+ and O2–. The
products of this electrolysis are given on the diagram.
Explain how they are formed. Use equations where appropriate.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
10) Nov 2011 [31] Q (4_b)
(b) Iron has two oxidation states +2 and +3. There are two possible equations
for the redox reaction between iron and bromine.
→ Fe 2+ + 2 Br −
Fe + Br2 
→ 2 Fe 3+ + 6 Br −
2 Fe + 3 Br2 
(i) Indicate, on the first equation, the change which is oxidation. Give a reason
for your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Which substance in the first equation is the reductant (reducing agent)?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

11) Nov 2011 [33] Q (6_b, iv)

(b) Nickel ores are converted into nickel(II) oxide. This can be reduced to
impure nickel by heating with carbon. The nickel is purified by the following
reversible reaction.
Ni(s) + 4CO(g) 
→ Ni(CO)4(g)
nickel carbonyl
(iv) Suggest another method of refining nickel. Give a brief description of the
method which you have suggested. A labelled diagram is acceptable.
[4]
12) May 2012 [31] Q (4_d)
(d) The oxidation states of vanadium in its compounds are V(+5), V(+4),
V(+3) and V(+2). The vanadium(III) ion can behave as a reductant or an
oxidant.
Indicate on the following equation which reactant is the oxidant.
2 V 3+ + Zn 
→ 2 V 2+ + Zn2+
[1]
Which change in the following equation is oxidation? Explain your choice
2 V 3+ + Fe3+ 
→ 2 V 4+ + Fe2+
............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[2]
13) May 2012 [32] Q (4_a, i, ii, b)
4 The ore of aluminium is bauxite which is impure aluminium oxide. Alumina,
pure aluminium oxide, is obtained from bauxite.
Aluminium is formed at the cathode when a molten mixture of alumina and
cryolite, Na3AlF6, is electrolysed.
(a) (i) Name two products formed at the anode in this electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) All the aluminium formed comes from the alumina not the cryolite.
Suggest two reasons why the electrolyte must contain cryolite.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The purification of bauxite uses large amounts of sodium hydroxide.
(i) Describe the chemistry of how sodium hydroxide is made from
concentrated aqueous sodium chloride. The description must include at least
one ionic equation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) Making sodium hydroxide from sodium chloride produces two other
chemicals.
Name these two chemicals and state one use of each chemical.
chemical .............................................................................................................
use .....................................................................................................................
chemical .............................................................................................................
use ................................................................................................................ [2]
14) Nov 2012 [32] Q (6)
6 During electrolysis, ions move in the electrolyte and electrons move in the
external circuit.
Reactions occur at the electrodes.
(a) The diagram shows the electrolysis of molten lithium iodide.

(i) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of the electron flow in
the external circuit. [1]
(ii) Electrons are supplied to the external circuit. How and where is this done?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why solid lithium iodide does not conduct electricity but when
molten it is a good conductor.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The results of experiments on electrolysis are shown in the following table.
Complete the table. The first line has been done as an example.
[4]
(c) The diagram below shows the electrolysis of dilute sulfuric acid. Hydrogen
is formed at the negative electrode (cathode) and oxygen at the positive
electrode (anode) and the concentration of sulfuric acid increases.
+ − 2−
The ions present in the dilute acid are H (aq ) , OH (aq ) and SO 4(aq ) .
(i) Write an equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Complete the equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).
−
4OH(aq) 
→ O2(g) + .....H2O(l) + .......
[1]
(iii) Suggest an explanation of why the concentration of the sulfuric acid
increases.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
15) Nov 2012 [33] Q (4_b, i, iv)
4 Zinc alloys have been used for over 2500 years.
(b) Zinc metal is made by the reduction of zinc oxide. The major ore of zinc is
zinc blende, ZnS. Zinc blende contains silver and lead compounds as well as
zinc sulfide.
Zinc blende is converted into impure zinc oxide by heating it in air.
2ZnS + 3O2 
→ 2ZnO + 2SO2
(i) Describe how zinc oxide is reduced to zinc.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Describe how zinc metal can be obtained from zinc sulfate solution by
electrolysis.
A labelled diagram is acceptable. Include all the products of this electrolysis.
The electrolysis is similar to that of copper(II) sulfate solution with inert
electrodes.
[4]
16) May 2013 [31] Q (4_a, iii, iv, v)
5 The reactivity series shows the metals in order of reactivity.
(a) The reactivity series can be established using displacement reactions. A
piece of zinc is added to aqueous lead nitrate. The zinc becomes coated with
a black deposit of lead.
Zn + Pb2+ 
→ Zn2+ + Pb
Zinc is more reactive than lead.

The reactivity series can be written as a list of ionic equations.

........ → ...... + ...... most reactive metal : the best reductant (reducing agent)
(iii) Explain why the positive ions are likely to be oxidants (oxidising agents).
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Deduce which ion is the best oxidant (oxidising agent).
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Which ion(s) in the list can oxidise lead metal?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
17) May 2013 [32] Q (6)
6 Aluminium is an important metal with a wide range of uses.
(a) Aluminium is obtained by the electrolysis of aluminium oxide dissolved in
molten cryolite.
(i) Solid aluminium oxide is a poor conductor of electricity. It conducts either

when molten or when dissolved in molten cryolite. Explain why.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Why is a solution of aluminium oxide in molten cryolite used rather than
molten aluminium oxide?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Explain why the carbon anodes need to be replaced periodically.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) One reason why graphite is used for the electrodes is that it is a good
conductor of electricity. Give another reason.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Aluminium is used to make food containers because it resists corrosion.
Explain why it is not attacked by the acids in food.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Aluminium is used for overhead power (electricity) cables which usually
have a steel core.
(i) Give two properties of aluminium which make it suitable for this use.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the cables have a steel core.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
18) Nov 2013 [32] Q (4_b, iii)
4 b (iii) A method being developed to produce iron with lower emissions of
carbon dioxide is by electrolysis. Hematite, Fe2O3, is dissolved in molten
lithium carbonate and electrolysed. The ore is spilt into its constituent
elements.
Write an equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).
............................................................................................................................
Complete the equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).
........O 2− 
→ ............... + ............... [3]
19) Nov 2013 [32] Q (6_b)
(b) (i) Define in terms of electron transfer the term oxidation.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the positive ions in the above equations are oxidising agents.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

20) Nov 2013 [33] Q (3_c)

3 (c) The solution of zinc sulfate is electrolysed using inert electrodes.
This electrolysis is similar to that of copper(II) sulfate with inert electrodes.
(i) Write the equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).
.........OH− 
→ 2H2O + ......... + .........e −
(iii) The electrolyte changes from zinc sulfate to
....................................................................................................................... [1]
21) May 2014 [31] Q (7_a, ii, iii)
(ii) Displacement reactions are redox reactions.
On the following equation, draw a ring around the reducing agent and an
arrow to show the change which is oxidation.
Zn + Pb2+ 
→ Zn2+ + Pb
[2]
(iii) Complete the following ionic equation.
Zn + 2Ag+ 
→ ....... + .......
[1]
22) May 2014 [32] Q (5_b)
(b) Chlorine is made by the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium
chloride.
Describe this electrolysis. Write ionic equations for the reactions at the
electrodes and name the sodium compound formed.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
23) May 2014 [33] Q (7)
7 Aluminium is obtained from purified alumina, Al 2O3, by electrolysis.
(a) Alumina is obtained from the main ore of aluminium.
State the name of this ore.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Describe the extraction of aluminium from alumina. Include the electrolyte,
the electrodes and the reactions at the electrodes.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [6]
(c) Aluminium is resistant to corrosion. It is protected by an oxide layer on its
surface.
The thickness of this oxide layer can be increased by anodising.
(i) State a use of aluminium due to its resistance to corrosion.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Anodising is an electrolytic process. Dilute sulfuric acid is electrolysed with
an aluminium object as the anode. The thickness of the oxide layer is
increased. Complete the equations for the reactions at the aluminium anode.
.......OH− → O2 + 2H2O + ......e −

....Al + ......... 
→ ......... Al 2O3
[4]
24) Nov 2014 [32] Q (2_a, b, c, i)
2 Aluminium is obtained by the reduction of aluminium ions to aluminium
atoms.
(a) Write an ionic equation for the reduction of an aluminium ion to an
aluminium atom.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The original method of extracting aluminium involved the reduction of
aluminium chloride using the reactive metal sodium. Aluminium obtained by
this method was very expensive due to the high cost of extracting sodium
from sodium chloride.
(i) Complete the equation for this reduction.
AlCl3 + .......Na 
→ ........... + ...........
[2]
(ii) How can sodium metal be obtained from sodium chloride?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) In the modern method, aluminium is obtained by the electrolysis of

aluminium oxide (alumina) dissolved in molten cryolite, Na3AlF6.
(i) The major ore of aluminium is impure aluminium oxide.

What is the name of this ore?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give two reasons why the electrolyte contains cryolite.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) The mixture of gases evolved at the positive electrode includes:
carbon dioxide
carbon monoxide
fluorine
oxygen
Explain the presence of these gases in the gaseous mixture formed at the
positive electrode. Include at least one equation in your explanation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]

25) Nov 2014 [32] Q (4_c)

(c) Zinc can be obtained from zinc oxide in a two step process. Aqueous zinc
sulfate is made from zinc oxide and then this solution is electrolysed with inert
electrodes. The electrolysis is similar to that of copper(II) sulfate with inert
electrodes.
(i) Name the reagent which will react with zinc oxide to form zinc sulfate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the following for the electrolysis of aqueous zinc sulfate.
Write the equation for the reaction at the negative electrode.
............................................................................................................................
Name the product at the positive electrode.
............................................................................................................................
The electrolyte changes from zinc sulfate to ......................................................
[3]
26) Nov 2014 [33] Q (5_b, i)
(b) The ions present in aqueous sodium chloride are Na+(aq), Cl–(aq), H+(aq) and
OH–(aq).
The electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride forms three
products. They are hydrogen, chlorine and sodium hydroxide.
(i) Explain how these three products are formed. Give ionic equations for the
reactions at the electrodes.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
27) May 2015 [31] Q (3_a)
3 (a) The reactions between metals and acids are redox reactions.
Zn + 2 H+ 
→ Zn2+ + H2
(i) Which change in the above reaction is oxidation, Zn to Zn2+ or 2H+ to H2?
Give a reason for your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Which reactant in the above reaction is the oxidising agent? Give a reason
for your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

28) May 2015 [32] Q (3_c)

(c) The reaction between calcium and nitrogen to form calcium nitride is a
redox reaction.
In terms of electron transfer, explain why calcium is the reducing agent.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
29) May 2015 [33] Q (6_a)
6 Chemical reactions are always accompanied by an energy change.
(a) Aluminium is extracted by the electrolysis of a molten mixture which
contains aluminium oxide, Al2O3. This decomposes to form aluminium at the
negative electrode and oxygen at the positive electrode.
(i) Write an ionic equation for the reaction at the negative electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Complete the ionic equation for the reaction at the positive electrode.
2 O2− 
→ ....... + .......
[2]
30) Nov 2015 [31] Q (7_a)
7 The rate of a photochemical reaction is affected by light.
(a) The decomposition of silver bromide is the basis of film photography. This
is a redox reaction.
(i) Which step is reduction? Explain your answer.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which ion is the oxidising agent? Explain your answer.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

31) Nov 2015 [32] Q (3_c)

3 Two of the main uses of zinc are for galvanising and for making alloys.
One of the main ores of zinc is zinc blende, ZnS. There are two stages in the
extraction of zinc from this ore.
(c) The zinc produced by this process is impure. It can be purified by
electrolysis using a method which is similar to the purification of copper.
Under the conditions used in the process, zinc is the product at the negative
electrode (cathode).
Complete the following description of this purification.
The electrolyte is aqueous .......................................................................... . [1]
The negative electrode (cathode) is made of .............................................. . [1]
The positive electrode (anode) is impure zinc.
The equation for the reaction at the cathode is ........................................... . [1]
The equation for the reaction at the anode is ............................................. . [1]
Explain why the concentration of the electrolyte does not change.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
32) Nov 2015 [33] Q (3_b, c)
(b) The diagram shows the electrolysis of molten lithium bromide.
(i) Mark on the diagram the direction of electron flow

(ii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction at the negative electrode
(cathode).
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) Which ion is oxidised? Explain your answer.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When aqueous lithium bromide is electrolysed, a colourless gas is formed
at the negative electrode and the solution becomes alkaline.
Explain these observations and include an equation in your explanation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
33) May 2016 [41] Q (4_a, b)
4 Electroplating steel objects with silver involves a three-step process.
step 1 A coating of copper is applied to the object.
step 2 A coating of nickel is applied to the object.
step 3 The coating of silver is applied to the object.
(a) A diagram of the apparatus used for step 1 is shown.
(i) The chemical process taking place on the surface of the object is
Cu2+(aq) + 2e 
 Cu(s)
Explain whether this process is oxidation or reduction.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the concentration of copper ions in the electrolyte remains
constant throughout step 1.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Give two changes which would be needed in order to coat nickel onto the
object in step 2.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
34) May 2016 [42] Q (4_e)
(e) Hydrogen can also be manufactured by electrolysis. The electrolyte is
concentrated aqueous sodium chloride. The electrodes are inert.
The products of electrolysis are hydrogen, chlorine and sodium hydroxide.
(i) Define the term electrolysis.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name a substance that can be used as the inert electrodes.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction in which hydrogen is
produced.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Where is hydrogen produced in the electrolytic cell?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
35) May 2016 [42] Q (6_d, ii, iii, iv, v)
Solutions of iron(II) chloride and iron(III) chloride were added to solutions of
potassium iodide and acidified potassium manganate(VII). The results are
shown in the table.
(ii) What types of substance cause potassium iodide solution to turn from
colourless to brown?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) What types of substance cause acidified potassium manganate(VII)

solution to turn from purple to colourless?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which ion in iron(III) chloride solution causes potassium iodide solution to
turn from colourless to brown?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Which ion in iron(II) chloride solution causes acidified potassium
manganate(VII) solution to turn from purple to colourless?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
36) Nov 2016 [41] Q (5)
5 Copper(II) sulfate solution was electrolysed using the apparatus shown.
(a) A gas was formed at the anode.

Identify this gas and give the test for this gas.
gas .....................................................................................................................
test .....................................................................................................................
result of test .......................................................................................................
[3]
(b) During electrolysis, electricity passes through the copper(II) sulfate
solution.
Solid copper(II) sulfate does not conduct electricity.
Explain both of these statements.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

c) The electrolysis was repeated using copper electrodes in place of carbon

electrodes. The ionic half-equations for the reactions at the two electrodes are
shown.
anode → Cu2+(aq) + 2e −
Cu(s) 
cathode Cu2+(aq) + 2e − 
→ Cu(s)
(i) Which species is reduced during the electrolysis? Explain your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The masses of the copper electrodes changed during the electrolysis.
State how and explain why the masses of the two copper electrodes
changed.
Use the ionic half-equations to help you.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why, during the electrolysis, the colour of the copper(II) sulfate
solution does not change.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
37) Nov 2016 [42] Q (6)
6 Aluminium is a very important metal.
Aluminium is extracted from its ore, bauxite, by electrolysis. Bauxite is an
impure form of aluminium oxide, Al2O3.
(a) Describe how aluminium is extracted from bauxite. Include an ionic half-
equation for the reaction at each electrode.
description ..........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
ionic half-equation for the anode reaction ..........................................................
ionic half-equation for the cathode reaction .......................................................
[5]
(b) Explain why the anodes have to be replaced regularly.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Give two uses of aluminium and give a reason why aluminium is suitable
for each use.
use 1 ..................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
use 2 ..................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
[4]
38) Nov 2016 [43] Q (4_e, f, g)
(e) A concentrated aqueous solution of sodium chloride is electrolysed using
carbon electrodes.
(i) Name the products formed at the electrodes.
product at the positive electrode (anode) ...........................................................
product at the negative electrode (cathode) ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the negative
electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) A dilute aqueous solution of sodium chloride is electrolysed using carbon
electrodes.
Name the main product formed at the positive electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) Molten sodium chloride is electrolysed using carbon electrodes.
(i) Name the product formed at the negative electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the negative
electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Chlorine is produced at the positive electrode.

Give the test for chlorine.
test .....................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
[2]
39) May 2017 [43] Q (5_a)
(a) In a simple cell using nickel and silver, the nickel is oxidised.
(i) Define oxidation in terms of electrons.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Nickel forms ions with a charge of +2.
Write an ionic half-equation to show the oxidation of nickel.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What will happen to the mass of the nickel electrode when the nickel is
oxidised?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
40) Nov 2017 [41] Q (3_a)
3 (a) When magnesium is added to aqueous copper(II) sulfate a reaction
occurs.
The ionic equation for the reaction is shown.
Mg + Cu2+ 
→ Mg2+ + Cu
(i) Give one change you would observe during this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why this is a redox reaction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Identify the oxidising agent in this reaction. Give a reason for your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) A redox reaction occurs when magnesium is heated with iron(III) oxide.
Write a chemical equation for the reaction between magnesium and iron(III)
oxide.
....................................................................................................................... [2]

41) Nov 2017 [41] Q (6_a, c)

6 Aluminium is extracted from aluminium oxide by electrolysis.
(a) Why is aluminium not extracted by heating aluminium oxide with carbon?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Aluminium can be extracted by electrolysis using the apparatus shown.
(i) Name the type of particle responsible for the transfer of charge in
the wires, ............................................................................................................
the electrolyte. ....................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Give two reasons why cryolite is used.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Write the ionic half-equation for the formation of aluminium during the
electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain how carbon dioxide gas is formed at the anodes.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(d) When a piece of aluminium is placed in dilute hydrochloric acid, there is no

immediate visible reaction.
If the aluminium is left in the dilute hydrochloric acid for several hours,
bubbles start to form.
Explain why aluminium does not react immediately with dilute hydrochloric
acid.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
42) Nov 2017 [42] Q (4)
4 A student sets up the following electrolysis experiment.
(a) Define the term electrolysis.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The student observes bubbles of colourless gas forming at each electrode.
(i) Name the main gas produced at the positive electrode (anode).
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe a test for the gas produced in (b)(i).
test .....................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction taking place at the negative
electrode (cathode).
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Charge is transferred during electrolysis.

Name the type of particle responsible for the transfer of charge in
the wires, ............................................................................................................
the electrolyte. ....................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The student replaces the dilute aqueous sodium chloride with
concentrated aqueous sodium chloride.
Suggest two differences that the student observes.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) The student has a small piece of impure copper. The main impurities in the
copper are small quantities of silver and zinc.
The student uses electrolysis to extract pure copper from the small piece of
impure copper.
(i) Complete the labels on the diagram of the student’s electrolysis
experiment.
[3]
(ii) Use your knowledge of the reactivity series to suggest what happens to
the silver and zinc impurities. Explain your answers.
silver impurities ..................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
zinc impurities ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]

43) May 2018 [41] Q (5_e)

(e) A student electrolyses aqueous copper(II) sulfate using the apparatus
shown.
Oxygen gas forms at the positive electrode (anode).

(i) Write an ionic half‑equation for the reaction at the negative electrode
(cathode). Include state symbols.
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe what the student observes at the negative electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give two other observations which the student makes during the
electrolysis.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) What difference would the student observe at the positive electrode if the
aqueous copper(II) sulfate were replaced by concentrated aqueous copper(II)
chloride?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
44) May 2018 [42] Q (4_c, f)
(c) Concentrated aqueous potassium bromide is an electrolyte.
(i) What is meant by the term electrolyte?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous potassium bromide.
Include:
● an ionic half-equation for the reaction at the cathode
● the name of the product at the anode
● the name of the potassium compound formed.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) When molten potassium bromide is electrolysed, the product at the
cathode is different.
Name the product at the cathode when molten potassium bromide is
electrolysed.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) When chlorine gas is passed through aqueous potassium bromide, a redox
reaction occurs.
The ionic equation is shown.
Cl2 + 2Br– 
→ 2Cl– + Br2
(i) Write an ionic half-equation showing what happens to the chlorine
molecules, Cl2, in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the bromide ions, Br–, act as reducing agents in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
45) May 2018 [43] Q (2_b)
(b) Aluminium is extracted from its ore by electrolysis.
(i) Name the main ore of aluminium.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why is aluminium not extracted from its ore by reduction with carbon?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The main ore of aluminium contains aluminium oxide. Aluminium oxide is
dissolved in molten cryolite before it is electrolysed.
Give two reasons, other than cost, why cryolite is used.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) The reaction at the anode during the extraction of aluminium by
electrolysis is shown.
2O2– 
→ O2 + 4e–
Is this process oxidation or reduction?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) During the extraction of aluminium by electrolysis, carbon dioxide is

formed at the anode.
Explain how carbon dioxide is formed at the anode.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
46) May 2018 [43] Q (5_b, c)
(b) Molten nickel(II) iodide can be electrolysed using the apparatus shown.
During electrolysis, charge is transferred through the copper wires and

through the molten nickel(II) iodide.
(i) Name the type of particles which transfer charge through the copper wires.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the type of particles which transfer charge through the molten
nickel(II) iodide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Predict the products of the electrolysis of molten nickel(II) iodide. Write an
ionic half-equation for the formation of one of these products.
products..............................................................................................................
ionic half-equation ..............................................................................................
[3]
(c) A student electrolysed copper(II) sulfate solution using the two sets of
apparatus shown.

In apparatus A the student used carbon electrodes.

In apparatus B the student used copper electrodes.
The student made the following observations.
(i) Explain why the mass of the negative electrode increased in both sets of
apparatus.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the gas that formed the bubbles seen in apparatus A.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the mass of the positive electrode decreased in apparatus B.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

140 6 – Rates of Reaction Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (3)

3 A diagram of the apparatus which could be used to investigate the rate of
reaction between magnesium and an excess of an acid is drawn below.
(a) The magnesium kept rising to the surface. In one experiment, this was
prevented by twisting the magnesium around a piece of copper. In a second
experiment, the magnesium was held down by a plastic net fastened to the
beaker.
(i) Suggest a reason why magnesium, which is denser than water, floated to
the surface.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Iron, zinc and copper have similar densities. Why was copper a better
choice than iron or zinc to weigh down the magnesium?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The only difference in the two experiments was the method used to hold
down the magnesium. The results are shown below.
(i) In which experiment did the magnesium react faster?

................................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Suggest a reason why the experiment chosen in (i) had the faster rate.
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The experiment was repeated using 1.0 mol/dm3 propanoic acid instead of
1.0 mol/dm3 hydrochloric acid. Propanoic acid is a weak acid.
(i) How would the graph for propanoic acid differ from the graph for
hydrochloric acid?
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) How would the graph for propanoic acid be the same as the graph for
hydrochloric acid?
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Give two factors which would alter the rate of this reaction.
For each factor explain why it alters the rate.
factor ..................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
factor ..................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[4]
2) Nov 2010 [32] Q (3)
3 The decomposition of hydrogen peroxide is catalysed by manganese(IV)
oxide.
 2H2O(l)
2H2O2(aq)  + O2(g)
To 50 cm3 of aqueous hydrogen peroxide, 0.50 g of manganese(IV) oxide
was added. The volume of oxygen formed was measured every 20 seconds.
The average reaction rate was calculated for each 20 second interval.
(a) Explain how the average reaction rate, 2.4 cm3 / s, was calculated for the
first 20 seconds.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Complete the table. [1]
(c) Explain why the average reaction rate decreases with time.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) The experiment was repeated but 1.0 g of manganese(IV) oxide was
added. What effect, if any, would this have on the reaction rate and on the
final volume of oxygen? Give a reason for each answer.
effect on rate ................................................................................................. [1]
reason ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
effect on final volume of oxygen ................................................................... [1]
reason ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
3) Nov 2010 [32] Q (6_d)
(d) The alcohol ethanol can be made by fermentation. Yeast is added to
aqueous glucose.
 2C2H5OH(aq)
C6H12O6(aq)  + 2CO2(g)
Carbon dioxide is given off and the mixture becomes warm as the reaction is
exothermic.
The graph shows how the rate of reaction varies over several days.
(i) Suggest a method of measuring the rate of this reaction.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Why does the rate increase initially?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the rate eventually decreases.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

4) Nov 2010 [33] Q (4_c)

4 (c) Sodium chlorate(I) is made by the reaction between chlorine and sodium
hydroxide. It is used as bleach but over time it decomposes.
 2NaCl(aq)
2NaClO(aq)  + O2(g)
The rate of decomposition can be studied using the apparatus shown below.
(i) How could you measure the rate of decomposition of sodium chlorate(I)?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how you could show that the rate of decomposition of sodium
chlorate(I) is a photochemical reaction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
5) May 2011 [32] Q (3)
3 The equation for the reaction between sodium thiosulfate and hydrochloric
acid is given below.
Na2S2O3(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ 2NaCl(aq) + S(s) + SO2(g) + H2O(l)
The speed of this reaction was investigated using the following experiment.
A beaker containing 50 cm3 of 0.2 mol / dm3 sodium thiosulfate was placed on
a black cross. 5.0 cm3 of 2.0 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid was added and the
clock was started.

Initially the cross was clearly visible. When the solution became cloudy and
the cross could no longer be seen, the clock was stopped and the time
recorded.
(a) The experiment was repeated with 25 cm3 of 0.2 mol/dm3 sodium
thiosulfate and 25 cm3 of water. Typical results for this experiment and a
further two experiments are given in the table.
(i) Explain why it is necessary to keep the total volume the same in all the
experiments.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Complete the table. [1]
(iii) How and why does the speed of the reaction vary from experiment 1 to 4?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The idea of collisions between reacting particles is used to explain
changes in the speed of reactions. Use this idea to explain the following
results.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

6) Nov 2011 [31] Q (5_a)

5 The rate of the reaction between iron and aqueous bromine can be
investigated using the apparatus shown below.
(a) A piece of iron was weighed and placed in the apparatus. It was removed
at regular intervals and the clock was paused. The piece of iron was washed,
dried, weighed and replaced. The clock was restarted.
This was continued until the solution was colourless.
The mass of iron was plotted against time. The graph shows the results
obtained.
(i) Suggest an explanation for the shape of the graph.

.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) Predict the shape of the graph if a similar piece of iron with a much
rougher surface had been used.
Explain your answer.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) Describe how you could find out if the rate of this reaction depended on
the speed of stirring.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]

7) Nov 2011 [33] Q (5_c)

(c) The reduction of silver(I) bromide to silver is the basis of film photography.
An opaque object is placed on a piece of paper coated with silver(I) bromide

which is then exposed to a bright light. The light is switched off and the
opaque object removed
Explain how the image is formed.

.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [4]
8) May 2012 [32] Q (6)
6 A length of magnesium ribbon was added to 50 cm3 of sulfuric acid,
concentration 1.0 mol / dm3. The time taken for the magnesium to react was
measured. The experiment was repeated with the same volume of different
acids. In all these experiments, the acid was in excess and the same length of
magnesium ribbon was used.
(a)
(i) Write these experiments in order of reaction speed. Give the experiment
with the fastest speed first.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Give reasons for the order you have given in (i).
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Suggest two changes to experiment C which would increase the speed of
the reaction and explain why the speed would increase. The volume of the
acid, the concentration of the acid and the mass of magnesium used were
kept the same.
change 1 ............................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
change 2 ............................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
9) Nov 2012 [31] Q (3_a, b)
3 The speed (rate) of a chemical reaction depends on a number of factors
which include temperature and the presence of a catalyst.
(a) Reaction speed increases as the temperature increases.
(i) Explain why reaction speed increases with temperature.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Reactions involving enzymes do not follow the above pattern.
The following graph shows how the speed of such a reaction varies with
temperature.

Suggest an explanation why initially the reaction speed increases then above
a certain temperature the speed decreases.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An organic compound decomposes to give off nitrogen.
C6H5N2Cl(aq) 
→ C6H5Cl(l) + N2(g)
The speed of this reaction can be determined by measuring the volume of
nitrogen formed at regular intervals. Typical results are shown in the graph
below.
(i) The reaction is catalysed by copper.

Sketch the graph for the catalysed reaction on the diagram above. [2]
(ii) How does the speed of this reaction vary with time?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why does the speed of reaction vary with time?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
10) Nov 2012 [31] Q (5_a, b)
5 Carbonyl chloride, COCl2, is widely used in industry to make polymers, dyes
and pharmaceuticals.
(a) Carbonyl chloride was first made in 1812 by exposing a mixture of carbon
monoxide and chlorine to bright sunlight. This is a photochemical reaction.
CO(g) + Cl2(g) 
→ COCl2(g)
(i) Explain the phrase photochemical reaction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Give another example of a photochemical reaction and explain why it is

important either to the environment or in industry.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
11) Nov 2012 [32] Q (3_c)
(c) The speed (rate) of reaction between an organic halide and water can be
measured by the following method.
A mixture of 10 cm3 of aqueous silver nitrate and 10 cm3 of ethanol is warmed
to 60 °C.
Drops of the organic halide are added and the time taken for a precipitate to
form is measured.
Silver ions react with the halide ions to form a precipitate of the silver halide.
−
+
Ag(aq) + X(aq) 
→ AgX(s)
Typical results for four experiments, A, B, C and D, are given in the table.
(i) Explain why it takes longer to produce a precipitate in experiment A than in B.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) How does the order of reactivity of the organic halides compare with the
order of reactivity of the halogens?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why the time taken to produce a precipitate would increase if the
experiments were repeated at 50 °C.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

12) May 2013 [31] Q (3_a, c)

3 A small piece of marble, CaCO3, was added to 5.0 cm3 of hydrochloric acid,
concentration 1.0 mol / dm3, at 25 °C. The time taken for the reaction to stop
was measured. The experiment was repeated using 5.0 cm3 of different
solutions of acids. The acid was in excess in all of the experiments.
Typical results are given in the table.
(a) (i) Explain why it is important that the pieces of marble are the same size
and the same shape.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) How would you know when the reaction had stopped?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) Explain why the reaction in experiment 1 is faster than the reaction in
experiment 2.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The acids used for experiment 1 and experiment 3 have the same
concentration.
Explain why experiment 3 is slower than experiment 1.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain in terms of collisions between reacting particles why experiment 4
is slower than experiment 1.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

13) May 2013 [33] Q (2_a, b)

2 One of the factors which determine the reaction rate of solids is particle
size.
(a) A mixture of finely powdered aluminium and air may explode when ignited.
An explosion is a very fast exothermic reaction. This causes a large and
sudden increase in temperature.
Explain each of the following in terms of collisions between reacting particles.
(i) Why is the reaction between finely powdered aluminium and air very fast?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why for most reactions the rate of reaction decreases with time.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest an explanation why the rate of reaction in an explosion could
increase rather than decrease with time.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) Give another example of a substance other than a metal which, when
finely powdered, might explode when ignited in air.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe a simple test-tube reaction which shows the effect of particle size
on the rate at which a solid reacts with a solution.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
14) Nov 2013 [31] Q (4_a, b, c)
4 20.0 g of small lumps of calcium carbonate and 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid,
concentration 2.0 mol / dm3, were placed in a fl ask on a top pan balance. The
mass of the fl ask and contents was recorded every minute.

The mass of carbon dioxide given off was plotted against time.
In all the experiments mentioned in this question, the calcium carbonate was
in excess.
(a) (i) Explain how you could determine the mass of carbon dioxide given off
in the first five minutes.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Label the graph F where the reaction rate is the fastest, S where it is
slowing down and 0 where the rate is zero. [2]
(iii) Explain how the shape of the graph shows where the rate is fastest,
where it is slowing down and where the rate is zero.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Sketch on the same graph, the line which would have been obtained if
20.0 g of small lumps of calcium carbonate and 80 cm3 of hydrochloric acid,
concentration 1.0 mol / dm3, had been used. [2]
(c) Explain in terms of collisions between reacting particles each of the
following.
(i) The reaction rate would be slower if 20.0 g of larger lumps of calcium
carbonate and 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, concentration 2.0 mol / dm3, were
used.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The reaction rate would be faster if the experiment was carried out at a
higher temperature.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

15) Nov 2013 [32] Q (2_c)

(c) Photochromic glass is used in sunglasses. In bright light, the glass
darkens reducing the amount of light reaching the eye. When the light is less
bright, the glass becomes colourless increasing the amount of light reaching
the eye.
Photochromic glass contains very small amounts of the halides silver(I)
chloride and copper(I) chloride.
The reaction between these two chlorides is photochemical.
How does photochromic glass work?

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
16) Nov 2013 [32] Q (3_b, ii)
(ii) Plants need nitrogen to make chlorophyll. Explain why chlorophyll is
essential for plant growth.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
17) May 2014 [31] Q (6_a, b, c)
6 Hydrogen peroxide decomposes to form water and oxygen. This reaction is
catalysed by manganese(IV) oxide.
2H2O2(aq) 
→ 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
The rate of this reaction can be investigated using the following apparatus.
40 cm3 of aqueous hydrogen peroxide was put in the flask and 0.1 g of small
lumps of manganese(IV) oxide was added. The volume of oxygen collected

was measured every 30 seconds. The results were plotted to give the graph
shown below.
(a) (i) How do the rates at times t1, t2 and t3 differ?

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain the trend in reaction rate that you described in (a)(i).
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The experiment was repeated using 0.1 g of finely powdered
manganese(IV) oxide. All the other variables were kept the same.
(i) On the axes opposite, sketch the graph that would be expected. [2]
(ii) Explain the shape of this graph. ...................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe how you could show that the catalyst, manganese(IV) oxide, was
not used up in the reaction. Manganese(IV) oxide is insoluble in water.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

18) May 2014 [32] Q (4_d)

(d) A piece of magnesium was added to 100 cm3 of an aqueous acid. The
time taken for the metal to react completely was measured. This experiment
was repeated using different aqueous acids. The same volume of acid was
used in each experiment and the pieces of magnesium used were identical. In
one experiment the reaction was carried out at a different temperature.
Explain the following in terms of collision rate between reacting particles.

(i) Why is the rate in experiment C slower than the rate in experiment A?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Why is the rate in experiment B faster than the rate in experiment A?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Why is the rate in experiment D faster than the rate in experiment A?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
19) May 2014 [33] Q (2_a)
2 Explain each of the following in terms of the kinetic particle theory.
(a) The rate of most reactions increases at higher temperatures.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

20) May 2014 [33] Q (3_a, c)

3 (a) Biological catalysts produced by microbes cause food to deteriorate and
decay.
(i) What is the name of these biological catalysts?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Freezing does not kill the microbes.
Suggest why freezing is still a very effective way of preserving food.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe how the pea plant makes a sugar such as glucose.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
21) Nov 2014 [32] Q (5_c)
(c) The effect of temperature on this reaction can be studied by the
experiment shown below.
Starch and iodine form a blue-black colour.
Glucose and iodine do not form a blue-black colour.
The experiment is set up as in the diagram and the time measured for the
mixture to change from blue-black to colourless. The experiment is repeated
at different temperatures.
Typical results of this experiment are given in the table below.

(i) Put the experiments in order of reaction rate – slowest first and fastest last.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the reaction rates in experiments A and B are different.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Suggest why the colour remains blue-black in experiment C.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
22) Nov 2014 [33] Q (5_a)
5 (a) Sodium chlorate(I) decomposes to form sodium chloride and oxygen.
The rate of this reaction is very slow at room temperature provided the sodium
chlorate(I) is stored in a dark bottle to prevent exposure to light.
2 NaClO 
→ 2 NaCl + O2
The rate of this decomposition can be studied using the following experiment.
Sodium chlorate(I) is placed in the fl ask and 0.2 g of copper(II) oxide is

added. This catalyses the decomposition of the sodium chlorate(I) and the
volume of oxygen collected is measured every minute. The results are plotted
to give a graph of the type shown below.

(i) Explain why the gradient (slope) of this graph decreases with time.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Cobalt(II) oxide is a more efficient catalyst for this reaction than copper(II)
oxide.
Sketch, on the grid, the graph for the reaction catalysed by cobalt(II) oxide.
All other conditions were kept constant. [2]
(iii) What can you deduce from the comment that sodium chlorate(I) has to be
shielded from light?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain, in terms of collisions between particles, why the initial gradient
would be steeper if the experiment was repeated at a higher temperature.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

23) May 2015 [31] Q (3_b, c)

(b) The rate of reaction between a metal and an acid can be investigated
using the apparatus shown below.
A piece of zinc foil was added to 50 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, of concentration

2.0 mol / dm3. The acid was in excess. The hydrogen evolved was collected in
the gas syringe and its volume measured every minute. The results were
plotted and labelled as graph 1.
The experiment was repeated to show that the reaction between zinc metal
and hydrochloric acid is catalysed by copper. A small volume of aqueous
copper(II) chloride was added to the acid before the zinc was added. The
results of this experiment were plotted on the same grid and labelled as graph 2.
(i) Explain why the reaction mixture in the second experiment contains copper
metal. Include an equation in your explanation.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how graph 2 shows that copper catalyses the reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) If the first experiment was repeated using ethanoic acid, CH3COOH,
instead of hydrochloric acid, how and why would the graph be different from
graph 1?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
24) May 2015 [32] Q (4_a)
4 Ammonia is made by the Haber process.
 2 NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3 H2(g) 
The forward reaction is exothermic.
Typical reaction conditions are:
• finely divided iron catalyst,
• temperature 450 °C,
• pressure 200 atmospheres.
(a) Explain why the catalyst is used as a very fi ne powder and larger pieces
of iron are not used.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
25) Nov 2015 [31] Q (7_b, c)
7 The rate of a photochemical reaction is affected by light.
(b) A piece of white paper was coated with silver bromide and exposed to the
light. Sections of the paper were covered as shown in the diagram.
Predict the appearance of the different sections of the paper after exposure to
the light and the removal of the card. Explain your predictions.
............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) Photosynthesis is another example of a photochemical reaction. Green
plants can make simple carbohydrates, such as glucose. These can
polymerise to make more complex carbohydrates, such as starch.
(i) Write a word equation for photosynthesis.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the substance which is responsible for the colour in green plants
and is essential for photosynthesis.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
26) May 2016 [41] Q (3)
3 When aqueous sodium thiosulfate and dilute hydrochloric acid are mixed, a
precipitate of insoluble sulfur is produced. This makes the mixture difficult to
see through.
Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ S(s) + 2NaCl(aq) + H2O(l) + SO2(g)
The time taken for the cross to disappear from view is measured.
A student adds the following volumes of aqueous sodium thiosulfate, dilute

hydrochloric acid and distilled water to the conical flask.
The time taken for the formation of the precipitate of sulfur to make the cross
disappear from view is recorded.

experiment volume of volume of volume of time taken for

number sodium thiosulfate hydrochloric acid distilled water cross to disappear
3 3 3
/ cm / cm / cm from view / s
1 10 10 40 56
2 20 10 30 28
(a) State the order in which the aqueous sodium thiosulfate, hydrochloric acid
and distilled water should be added to the flask.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In experiment 3 the student wanted the sodium thiosulfate to be double
the concentration used in experiment 2.
(i) Complete the table to show the volumes which should be used and the
expected time taken for the cross to disappear from view in experiment 3. [2]
(ii) Use collision theory to explain why increasing the concentration of sodium
thiosulfate would change the rate of reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The student repeated experiment 1 at a higher temperature.
Use collision theory to explain why the rate of reaction would increase.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

27) Nov 2016 [41] Q (8)

8 Magnesium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
MgCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ MgCl2(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
An excess of magnesium carbonate pieces was added to dilute hydrochloric
acid. The apparatus in the diagram was used to measure the volume of gas
produced. The total volume of gas collected was recorded every 20 seconds.
(a) The results obtained are shown on the graph.
(i) Describe how the rate of this reaction changed during the reaction. Explain
why the rate changed in this way.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

(ii) The experiment was repeated using the same mass of powdered
magnesium carbonate with the same volume and concentration of dilute
hydrochloric acid.
Explain how the initial rate of reaction and total volume of gas collected would
compare to the first experiment.
initial rate of reaction ..........................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
total volume of gas .............................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) A piece of magnesium ribbon was cleaned. The experiment was repeated
using this clean magnesium ribbon instead of magnesium carbonate.
Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ MgCl2(aq) + H2(g)
This reaction is exothermic.
The rate of the reaction gradually increased over the first 2 minutes.
Explain why the rate of the reaction increased.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
28) May 2017 [41] Q (5)
5 When barium carbonate is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, carbon dioxide
gas is formed.
A student carried out an experiment to measure the volume of gas formed as
a reaction proceeds.
The student added a small mass of powdered barium carbonate to an excess
of 0.1 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid. A graph of the results was drawn.
The graph is shown.

(a) Name the two pieces of apparatus needed to take the measurements
shown on the graph.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) On the axes below, sketch a graph to show how the rate of reaction
changes as the reaction proceeds.
Assume the initial rate of reaction is represented by the point at X.
[2]

(d) The original graph has been drawn again.

On the grid, draw the graph expected if the same mass of barium carbonate is
added as large lumps instead of as a powder. All other conditions are the
same as in the original experiment.
Explain why your graph is different from the original graph.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) The original graph has been drawn again.
On the grid, draw the graph expected if the concentration of dilute
hydrochloric acid is changed from 0.1 mol / dm3 to 0.2 mol / dm3. All other
conditions are the same as in the original experiment.
Explain, in terms of particles, why your graph is different from the original
graph.

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(f) The experiment is changed and the mass of powdered barium carbonate is
doubled. All other conditions are the same as in the original experiment. The
acid is still in excess.
Deduce the volume of gas formed at room temperature and pressure, in cm3,
in this experiment.
volume of gas = .............................. cm3 [1]

29) Nov 2017 [41] Q (7_a)

7 Copper(II) oxide reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
CuO(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ CuCl2(aq) + H2O(l)
6.00 g of copper(II) oxide were added to 50.0 cm3 of 1.00 mol / dm3
hydrochloric acid. This was an excess of copper(II) oxide.
(a) The rate of the reaction can be increased by increasing the concentration
of the hydrochloric acid or by heating it.
(i) In terms of collisions, explain why increasing the concentration of the
hydrochloric acid increases the rate of the reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) In terms of collisions, explain why heating the hydrochloric acid increases
the rate of the reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
30) Nov 2017 [42] Q (3_a, b)
3 The chemical equation for the complete combustion of ethanol, C2H5OH, is
shown.
C2H5OH + 3O2 
→ 2CO2 + 3H2O
The energy released when one mole of ethanol undergoes complete
combustion is 1280 kJ.
Part of the energy level diagram for this reaction is shown.

(a) Complete the energy level diagram to show

● the products of the reaction,
● the overall energy change of the reaction.
[3]
(b) What does X represent?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
31) Nov 2017 [43] Q (7_a, iii)
7 (a) Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV of the Periodic Table.
Carbon dioxide from the air moves into green plants and is converted into
carbohydrates.
(iii) Name the process by which carbon dioxide is converted into glucose,
C6H12O6, in green plants. Give two conditions required for this process to
occur. Write a chemical equation for the reaction which occurs.
name of process ................................................................................................
condition 1 ..........................................................................................................
condition 2 ..........................................................................................................
chemical equation ..............................................................................................
[5]
32) May 2018 [43] Q (3_d, ii, iii)
(ii) The rate of reaction of cobalt with dilute hydrochloric acid can be made
faster by heating the acid or by increasing its concentration.
State one other way to make the rate of reaction faster.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Use collision theory to explain how heating the dilute hydrochloric acid
makes the rate of reaction faster.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

171 7 – Energy Changes Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [32] Q (5_b)

5 Fuel cells are used in spacecraft to produce electrical energy.
(b) Hydrogen and oxygen react to form water

2H2 + O2 
 2H2O
(i) Give an example of bond breaking in the above reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give an example of bond forming in the above reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Is the change given in (i) exothermic or endothermic?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
2) Nov 2010 [31] Q (3_c)
3 The diagram shows a cell. This is a device which produces electrical
energy. The reaction in a cell is a redox reaction and involves electron
transfer
(i) Complete the sentence.

A cell will change ........................................... energy into electrical energy. [1]
(ii) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of the electron flow.[1]

(iii) In the left hand beaker, the colour changes from brown to colourless.
Complete the equation for the reaction.
Br2 + ............... 
→ ...............
[2]
(iv) Is the change in (iii) oxidation or reduction? Give a reason for your
choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Complete the following description of the reaction in the right hand beaker.
Fe2+ changes into .......................... [1]
(vi) When a solution of bromine is replaced by a solution of chlorine, the
voltage increases. When a solution of bromine is replaced by a solution of
iodine, the voltage decreases.
Suggest an explanation for this difference.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
3) May 2011 [32] Q (5)
5 The diagram shows a simple cell.
(a) Write an equation for the overall reaction occurring in the cell.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why all cell reactions are exothermic and redox.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Which electrode, zinc or iron, is the negative electrode? Give a reason for
your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest two ways of increasing the voltage of this cell.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
4) Nov 2011 [33] Q (7_c)
(iii) Bond energy is the amount of energy, in kJ, which must be supplied to
break one mole of the bond.
Use the data in the table to show that the following reaction is exothermic
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
5) May 2012 [31] Q (8_a)
8 Iron and steel rust when exposed to water and oxygen. Rust is hydrated
iron(III) oxide.
(a) The following cell can be used to investigate rusting

(i) What is a cell?

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Which electrode will be oxidised and become smaller? Explain your choice
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) What measurements would you need make to find the rate of rusting of
the electrode
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Suggest an explanation why the addition of salt to the water increases the
rate of rusting.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
6) Nov 2012 [32] Q (6_d)
(d) In the apparatus used in (c), the power supply is removed and
immediately replaced by a voltmeter
A reading on the voltmeter shows that electrical energy is being produced.

Suggest an explanation for how this energy is produced.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

7) Nov 2012 [33] Q (7_d)

 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 
(d) (i) What is the difference between an endothermic and an exothermic
reaction?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Bond breaking is an endothermic process. Bond energy is the amount of
energy needed to break or form one mole of the bond. Complete the table and
explain why the forward reaction is exothermic.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
8) May 2013 [31] Q (5_b)
(b) A reactivity series can also be established by measuring the voltage of
simple cells. The diagram shows a simple cell.

Results from cells using the metals tin, cadmium, zinc and copper are given in
the table below.
Write the four metals in order of increasing reactivity and explain how you
used the data in the table to determine this order.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
9) Nov 2013 [31] Q (7_b, c)
(b) Bond forming is exothermic, bond breaking is endothermic. Explain the
difference between an exothermic reaction and an endothermic reaction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Use the bond energies to show that the following reaction is exothermic.
Bond energy is the amount of energy (kJ / mol) which must be supplied to
break one mole of the bond
Bond energies in kJ / mol
Cl − Cl +242
C − Cl +338
C −H +412
H − Cl +431

bonds broken energy in kJ / mol
………………… …………………
………………… …………………
total energy = …………………
bonds formed energy in kJ / mol
………………… …………………
………………… …………………
total energy = …………………
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
10) May 2014 [31] Q (7_b)
(b) Another way of determining the order of reactivity of metals is by
measuring the voltage and polarity of simple cells. The polarity of a cell is
shown by which metal is the positive electrode and which metal is the
negative electrode. An example of a simple cell is shown below.
(i) Mark on the above diagram the direction of the electron flow. [1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of electron transfer, why the more reactive metal is
always the negative electrode.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

11) May 2014 [33] Q (5_e)

(e) Ammonia is used to make nitrogen trifluoride, NF3.
Nitrogen trifluoride is essential to the electronics industry. It is made by the
following reaction.
Determine if the above reaction is exothermic or endothermic using the

following bond energies and by completing the following table. The first line
has been done as an example.
Bond energy is the amount of energy, in kJ / mole, needed to break or make
one mole of the bond.
bond bond energy in kJ / mole
N −H 390
F −F 155
N −F 280
H −F 565
bond bond energy in kJ / mole
N −H (3 × 390) = 1170
F −F
N −F
H −F
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

12) Nov 2014 [32] Q (4_d)

(d) A dry cell (battery) has a central rod, usually made of graphite. This is the
positive electrode which is surrounded by the electrolyte, typically a paste of
ammonium chloride and manganese(IV) oxide, all of which are in a zinc
container which is the negative electrode.
(i) Draw an arrow on the diagram to indicate the direction of electron flow. [1]
(ii) Suggest why the electrolyte is a paste.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The following changes occur in a dry cell.
For each change, decide if it is oxidation or reduction and give a reason for
your choice.
Zn to Zn2+
............................................................................................................................
manganese(IV) oxide to manganese(III) oxide
............................................................................................................................
13) Nov 2014 [33] Q (4)
4 A fuel cell produces electrical energy by the oxidation of a fuel by oxygen.
The fuel is usually hydrogen but methane and methanol are two other fuels
which may be used.
A diagram of a hydrogen fuel cell is given below.

(a) When the fuel is hydrogen, the only product is water.

What additional product would be formed if methane was used?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Write the equation for the chemical reaction that takes place in a hydrogen
fuel cell.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) At which electrode does oxidation occur? Explain your choice.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction at this electrode.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Fuel cells are used to propel cars.
Give two advantages of a fuel cell over a gasoline-fuelled engine.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
14) May 2015 [33] Q (6_b)
(b) The cell shown below can be used to determine the order of reactivity of
metals.
(i) Is the reaction in the cell exothermic or endothermic? Explain your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the mass of the magnesium electrode decreases and the
mass of the copper electrode increases.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) How could you use this cell to determine which is the more reactive metal,
magnesium or manganese?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) The combustion of propane, C3H8, is exothermic.

Give an equation for the complete combustion of propane.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Photosynthesis is an unusual endothermic reaction.
(i) Where does the energy for photosynthesis come from?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give the word equation for photosynthesis.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
15) Nov 2015 [32] Q (4_b)
(b) Bond breaking is an endothermic change and bond forming is an
exothermic change.
Bond energy is the amount of energy in kJ / mol needed to break one mole of
the specified bond.
Use the following bond energies to determine whether this reaction is

exothermic or endothermic. You must show your reasoning.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

16) May 2016 [41] Q (2_f)

(f) Sulfur tetrafluoride, SF4, can be made by combining gaseous sulfur with
fluorine.
S(g) + 2F2(g) 
 SF4(g)
The reaction is exothermic.
(i) Complete the energy level diagram for this reaction. Include an arrow
which clearly shows the energy change during the reaction.
[3]
(ii) During the reaction the amount of energy given out is 780 kJ / mol.
The F–F bond energy is 160 kJ / mol.
Use this information to determine the bond energy, in kJ / mol, of one S–F
bond in SF4.
.................................. kJ / mol [3]

17) May 2017 [41] Q (4_c)

(c) When rods of zinc and copper are placed into dilute sulfuric acid as
shown, electricity is generated.
(i) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the zinc rod.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the copper rod.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The copper rod was replaced by an iron rod.
Suggest the change, if any, in the intensity of the light emitted from the bulb
and give a reason for your answer.
change ...............................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[2]
18) May 2017 [42] Q (4_c)
(c) Three cells are set up each using two metals.

(i) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the zinc electrode
in cell 1.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Put the three metals, copper, nickel and zinc, in order of reactivity.
[1]
(iii) Complete the labelling in cell 3 by writing the polarity (+/–) of each
electrode in the circles and calculating the reading on the voltmeter. [2]
19) May 2017 [42] Q (5_d)
(d) Iodine reacts with chlorine. The chemical equation is shown.
I2 + Cl2 
→ 2ICl
Use the bond energies to answer the questions.
(i) Calculate the total amount of energy required to break the bonds in 1 mole
of I2 and 1 mole of Cl2.
............................ kJ [1]
(ii) Calculate the total amount of energy given out when the bonds in 2 moles
of ICl are formed.
............................ kJ [1]
(iii) Use your answers to (d)(i) and (d)(ii) to calculate the overall energy
change for the reaction.
I2 + Cl2 
→ 2ICl
............................ kJ / mol [1]

20) May 2017 [43] Q (2_b, c)

2 Cyclopropane is a colourless gas.
Cyclopropane reacts with bromine at room temperature. The chemical
equation for the reaction is shown.
(b) The reaction of cyclopropane with bromine is exothermic.

(i) Complete the energy level diagram for this reaction by
● adding the product of the reaction,
● labelling the energy change, ΔH.
[2]
(ii) Propene also reacts with bromine.
Use the bond energies in the table to calculate the energy change, ΔH, for the
reaction.

energy change = ............................ kJ / mol [3]

21) May 2017 [43] Q (5_b, c)
The simple cell was used with different metals as electrodes. The voltages
were recorded in the table.
● If the voltage measured is positive then metal 2 is more reactive than metal 1.
● If the voltage measured is negative then metal 1 is more reactive than metal 2.
(b) Use the data in the table to answer the following questions.
(i) Which of the metals in the table is the most reactive?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State which two different metals have the same reactivity.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Predict the voltage produced by a simple cell with beryllium as metal 1
and silver as metal 2.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe how the simple cell in the diagram can be used to show that
magnesium is more reactive than beryllium. Explain your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
22) Nov 2017 [42] Q (3_c)
(c) The chemical equation for the complete combustion of methanol, CH3OH,
is shown.
2CH3OH + 3O2 
→ 2CO2 + 4H2O
The equation can be represented as shown.
Use the bond energies in the table to determine the energy change, ΔH, for
the complete combustion of one mole of methanol.
● energy needed to break bonds
.............................. kJ

● energy released when bonds are formed
.............................. kJ
● energy change, ΔH, for the complete combustion of one mole of methanol
.............................. kJ / mol
[4]
23) Nov 2017 [43] Q (4_a, b, c, d)
4 Hydrogen and oxygen react together in a hydrogen fuel cell. A hydrogen
fuel cell is shown in the diagram.
(a) Name the process by which oxygen is obtained from air.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) In a hydrogen fuel cell, the hydrogen molecules are converted into
hydrogen ions, H+, according to the ionic half-equation shown.
H2 
 2H+ + 2e–
What type of reaction does this ionic half-equation represent?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Write a chemical equation for the overall reaction that occurs in a
hydrogen fuel cell.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Hydrogen fuel cells are being developed as alternatives to petrol engines
in cars.
(i) Give one advantage of hydrogen fuel cells compared to petrol engines.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give one disadvantage of hydrogen fuel cells compared to petrol engines.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
24) May 2018 [41] Q (5_c, d)
(c) The energy level diagram shows the energy profile for the reaction
between zinc and dilute sulfuric acid.
(i) Complete the diagram by adding the formulae of the products. Include
state symbols. [3]
(ii) Draw an arrow on the diagram to represent the activation energy. [1]
(iii) Is the reaction endothermic or exothermic? Explain your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The reaction between zinc and dilute sulfuric acid can be catalysed by the
addition of aqueous copper(II) sulfate.
On the diagram, add the energy profile for the catalysed reaction.
[1]

191 8 – Reversible Reactions Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (6)

6 Iodine reacts with chlorine to form dark brown iodine monochloride
I2 + Cl2 
→ 2ICl
This reacts with more chlorine to give yellow iodine trichloride.
There is an equilibrium between these iodine chlorides.
(a) Explain what is meant by equilibrium.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) When the equilibrium mixture is heated it becomes a darker brown colour.
Is the reverse reaction endothermic or exothermic? Give a reason for your
choice.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The pressure on the equilibrium mixture is decreased.
(i) How would this affect the position of equilibrium and why?
It would move to the ...................................................................................... [1]
reason ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what you would observe.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
2) May 2010 [32] Q (8)
(b) At most temperatures, samples of nitrogen dioxide are equilibrium mixtures
(i) At 25 °C, the mixture contains 20 % of nitrogen dioxide. At 100 °C this has
risen to 90 %. Is the forward reaction exothermic or endothermic?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why the colour of the equilibrium mixture becomes lighter when
the pressure on the mixture is increased.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
3) Nov 2010 [31] Q (4_b)
(b) Ammonia is made by the Haber process.
 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g)  forward reaction is exothermic
The percentage of ammonia in the equilibrium mixture varies with conditions.
The conditions actually used are 200 atmospheres, 450 °C and an iron
catalyst.
(i) The original catalyst was platinum. Suggest a reason why it was changed
to iron.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the highest pressure gives the highest percentage of
ammonia in the equilibrium mixture.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) What happens to the unreacted nitrogen and hydrogen?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using a lower temperature.
advantage ..........................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
disadvantage ......................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

4) May 2011 [31] Q (4_b)

4 (b) Sulfur dioxide is used to make sulfur trioxide in the contact process
2SO2(g)  2SO3(g)
+ O2(g) 
The following reaction is exothermic. The conditions used are
Temperature: 450 °C
Pressure: 2 atmospheres
Catalyst: vanadium (V) oxide
Explain mentioning both position of equilibrium and rate, why these conditions
give the most economic yield
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
5) May 2011 [32] Q (6_a)
6 (a) Methanol can be made from a mixture of carbon monoxide and
hydrogen.
 CH3OH(g)
CO(g) + 2H2(g) 
(i) Explain why the concentration of methanol at equilibrium does not change.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest conditions, in terms of temperature and pressure, which would
give a high yield of methanol.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) How would the conditions used in practice compare with those given in (ii)?
Give an explanation of any differences.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

6) Nov 2011 [31] Q (4_a, b)

4 Reversible reactions can come to equilibrium. The following are three
examples of types of gaseous equilibria.
A2(g) + B2(g) 
→ 2AB(g) reaction 1
A2(g) + 3B2(g) 
→ 2AB3(g) reaction 2
2AB2(g) 
→ 2AB(g) + B2(g) reaction 3
(a) Explain the term equilibrium.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The following graphs show how the percentage of products of a reversible
reaction at equilibrium could vary with pressure.
For each graph, decide whether the percentage of products decreases,
increases or stays the same when the pressure is increased, then match
each graph to one of the above reactions and give a reason for your choice.
(i)
effect on percentage of products .......................................................................

reaction ..............................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)

reaction ..............................................................................................................

reason ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii)

reaction ..............................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
7) Nov 2011 [32] Q (3_c)
(c) When antimony chloride is added to water, a faint white precipitate forms
and the mixture slowly goes cloudy.
(i) Explain why after some time the appearance of the mixture remains unchanged.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) When a few drops of concentrated hydrochloric acid are added to the
mixture, it changes to a colourless solution. Suggest an explanation.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Suggest how you could make the colourless solution go cloudy.
.................................................................................................................................. [1]

8) Nov 2011 [33] Q (6_b)

(b) Nickel ores are converted into nickel(II) oxide. This can be reduced to
impure nickel by heating with carbon. The nickel is purified by the following
reversible reaction.
(i) Impure nickel is heated at 60 °C. The forward reaction occurs
The nickel carbonyl, a gas, moves into a hotter chamber at 200 °C. The
backward reaction occurs and the nickel carbonyl decomposes.
Is the forward reaction exothermic or endothermic? Give a reason for your

answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the forward reaction is favoured by an increase in pressure.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest what happens to the impurities.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
9) May 2012 [31] Q (4_c)
(c) Vanadium(V) oxide is used to catalyse the exothermic reaction between
sulfur dioxide and oxygen in the Contact Process.
2SO2 + O2  2SO3

The rate of this reaction can be increased either by using a catalyst or by
increasing the temperature. Explain why a catalyst is used and not a higher
temperature.
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
....................................................................................................................... [2]

10) Nov 2012 [31] Q (5_b)

5 Carbonyl chloride, COCl2, is widely used in industry to make polymers, dyes
and pharmaceuticals.
(b) Carbonyl chloride is now made by the reversible reaction given below.
 COCl2(g)
CO(g) + Cl2(g) 
The reaction is catalysed by carbon within a temperature range of 50 to 150 °C.
(i) Predict the effect on the yield of carbonyl chloride of increasing the
pressure.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) If the temperature is allowed to increase to above 200 °C, very little
carbonyl chloride is formed. Explain why.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why a catalyst is used.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
11) Nov 2012 [32] Q (7_b)
(b) Methanol is manufactured using the following method.
CH4(g) + H2O(g) 
→ CO(g) + 3H2(g) reaction 1
 CH3OH(g)
CO(g) + 2H2(g)  reaction 2
The conditions for reaction 2 are:
pressure 100 atmospheres
catalyst a mixture of copper, zinc oxide and aluminium oxide
temperature 250 °C
(i) Why is high pressure used in reaction 2?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why using a catalyst at 250 °C is preferred to using a higher
temperature of 350 °C and no catalyst.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

12) Nov 2012 [33] Q (7_c)

 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 
(c) This reaction is carried out at a high pressure, 200 atmospheres.
State, with an explanation for each, two advantages of using a high pressure.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
13) May 2013 [32] Q (4_a)
4 At present the most important method of manufacturing hydrogen is steam
reforming of methane.
(a) In the first stage of the process, methane reacts with steam at 800 °C.
 3H2(g) + CO(g)
CH4(g) + H2O(g) 
In the second stage of the process, carbon monoxide reacts with steam at
200 °C.
 CO2(g) + H2(g)
CO(g) + H2O(g) 
(i) Explain why the position of equilibrium in the first reaction is affected by
pressure but the position of equilibrium in the second reaction is not.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why a high temperature is needed in the first reaction to get a
high yield of products but in the second reaction a high yield is obtained at a
low temperature.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

14) May 2013 [33] Q (5_b)

(b) Almost all samples of nitrogen dioxide are an equilibrium mixture of
nitrogen dioxide, NO2, and dinitrogen tetroxide, N2O4.
In the forward reaction, a bond forms between the two nitrogen dioxide
molecules.
NO2 + NO2 
→ O2N – NO2
(i) Explain the term equilibrium mixture.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The syringe contains a sample of the equilibrium mixture. The plunger was
pulled back reducing the pressure.
How would the colour of the gas inside the syringe change? Give an
explanation for your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) A sealed tube containing an equilibrium mixture of nitrogen dioxide and
dinitrogen tetroxide was placed in a beaker of ice cold water.
The colour of the mixture changed from brown to pale yellow.
Is the forward reaction exothermic or endothermic? Give an explanation for
your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) What other piece of information given in the equation supports your
answer to (iii)?
NO2 + NO2 
→ O2N–NO2
....................................................................................................................... [1]

15) Nov 2013 [31] Q (3_b)

3 Ammonia is manufactured by the Haber process.
 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 
(b) The percentage of ammonia in the equilibrium mixture varies with
(i) Which pair of graphs, A, B or C, shows correctly how the percentage of
ammonia at equilibrium varies with temperature and pressure?
The pair with both graphs correct is ........................................................... [1]

(ii) Give a full explanation of why the pair of graphs you have chosen in (i) is
correct.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [6]

(iii) Catalysts do not alter the position of equilibrium. Explain why a catalyst is
used in this process.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
16) Nov 2013 [32] Q (3_a)
3 (a) Nitric acid is now made by the oxidation of ammonia. It used to be made
from air and water. This process used very large amounts of electricity.
Air was blown through an electric arc and heated to 3000 °C.
The equilibrium mixture leaving the arc contained 5 % of nitric oxide. This
mixture was cooled rapidly. At lower temperatures, nitric oxide will react with
oxygen to form nitrogen dioxide
Nitrogen dioxide reacts with oxygen and water to form nitric acid.
(i) Suggest a reason why the yield of nitric oxide in equilibrium 1 increases
with temperature.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What effect, if any, would increasing the pressure have on the percentage
of nitric oxide in equilibrium 1? Explain your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Deduce why equilibrium 2 is only carried out at lower temperatures.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Complete the equation for the reaction between nitrogen dioxide, water
and oxygen to form nitric acid.
........NO2 + O2 + ............ 
→ ............HNO3 [2]
(v) Ammonia is more expensive than water and air. Suggest a reason why the
ammonia-based process is preferred to the electric arc process.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

17) May 2014 [32] Q (5_a)

5 Carbonyl chloride is made from carbon monoxide and chlorine.
CO(g) + Cl2(g)  COCl2(g)

(a) Two methods of preparing carbon monoxide are from methane and
oxygen, and from methane and steam.
(i) The reaction between methane and oxygen can also form carbon dioxide.
How can carbon monoxide be made instead of carbon dioxide?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The following reaction is used to make carbon monoxide and hydrogen.
The reaction is carried out at 1100 °C and normal pressure.
CH4(g) + H2O(g) 
→ CO(g) + 3H2(g)
The reaction is reversible and comes to equilibrium. Suggest why a high
temperature is used.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) What is the disadvantage of using a high pressure for the reaction given
in (a)(ii)?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
18) May 2014 [33] Q (5)
N2(g) + 3H2(g)  2NH3(g)

The conditions in the reaction chamber are:
● a pressure of 200 atmospheres,
● a catalyst of finely divided iron,
● a temperature of 400 to 450 °C.
(a) What are the two advantages of using a high pressure? Give a reason for
both.
advantage 1 .......................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
advantage 2 .......................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[4]

(b) A higher temperature would give a faster reaction rate.

Why is a higher temperature not used?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) (i) Why is the iron catalyst used as a fine powder?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give two reasons why a catalyst is used.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
19) Nov 2014 [32] Q (6_b, i)
(i) When this mineral is heated gently it dehydrates.
Describe how you could show that this reaction is reversible.

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
20) Nov 2014 [33] Q (8_a)
8 (a) Describe how cobalt chloride paper can be used to test for the presence
of water.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

21) May 2015 [31] Q (5_c, d)

(c) Iodine reacts with chlorine to form a dark brown liquid, iodine
monochloride
When more chlorine is added and the tube is sealed, a reversible reaction
occurs and the reaction comes to equilibrium.
ICl(l) + Cl2(g) 
 ICl3(s)
dark brown yellow
(i) Give another example of a reversible reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain the term equilibrium.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Chlorine is removed from the tube and a new equilibrium is formed.
Explain why there is less of the yellow solid and more dark brown liquid in the
new equilibrium mixture.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) A sealed tube containing the equilibrium mixture is placed in ice-cold
water. There is an increase in the amount of yellow solid in the equilibrium
mixture.
What can you deduce about the forward reaction in this equilibrium?
 ICl3(s)
ICl(l) + Cl2(g) 

Explain your deduction.

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
22) May 2015 [32] Q (4_b, c)
 2 NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3 H2(g) 
Typical reaction conditions are:
• finely divided iron catalyst,
• temperature 450 °C,
• pressure 200 atmospheres.
(b) Using the above conditions, the equilibrium mixture contains about 15%
ammonia.
State two changes to the reaction conditions which would increase the
percentage of ammonia at equilibrium.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest why the changes you have described in (b) are not used in
practice.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
23) Nov 2015 [31] Q (3)
3 Sulfuric acid is made by the Contact process.
(a) Sulfur is burned by spraying droplets of molten sulfur into air.
Suggest and explain an advantage of using this method.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The following equation represents the equilibrium in the Contact process.
 2SO3(g)
2SO2(g) + O2(g) 
Oxygen is supplied from the air.

The composition of the reaction mixture is 1 volume of sulfur dioxide to 1

volume of oxygen.
What volume of air contains 1 dm3 of oxygen?
................................................................................................................ dm3 [1]
(c) Sulfur dioxide is more expensive than air.
What is the advantage of using an excess of air?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The forward reaction is exothermic. The reaction is usually carried out at a
temperature between 400 and 450 °C.
(i) What is the effect on the position of equilibrium of using a temperature
above 450 °C?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What is the effect on the rate of using a temperature below 400 °C?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) A low pressure, 2 atmospheres, is used. At equilibrium, about 98% SO3 is
present.
(i) What is the effect on the position of equilibrium of using a higher pressure?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why a higher pressure is not used.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
24) May 2016 [41] Q (2_g, ii)
(g) Chlorine and compounds of chlorine are important in water treatment and
in laboratory testing for water.
(ii) A compound of chlorine is used in the laboratory to test for the presence of
water.
Name the compound of chlorine used in this test and describe the colour
change seen in a positive result of this test.
name of compound ............................................................................................
colour change from ............................................. to ..........................................
[3]

25) May 2016 [42] Q (4)

4 Hydrogen can be manufactured from methane by steam reforming.
 CO(g) + 3H2(g)
CH4(g) + H2O(g) 
The reaction is carried out using a nickel catalyst at temperatures between
700 °C and 1100 °C and using a pressure of one atmosphere.
The forward reaction is endothermic.
(a) What is meant by the term catalyst?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Suggest two reasons why a temperature lower than 700 °C is not used.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest one advantage of using a pressure greater than one atmosphere.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest one disadvantage of using a pressure greater than one
atmosphere.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
26) Nov 2016 [41] Q (4_b)
(b) Ammonia is also made when ammonium carbonate decomposes.
 2NH3(g) + H2O(g) + CO2(g)
(NH4)2CO3(s) 
The reaction is reversible and can reach a position of equilibrium.
The graph shows how the yield of ammonia at equilibrium changes with
(i) What is meant by the term equilibrium for a reversible reaction?

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Using information from the graph, explain whether the reaction is
endothermic or exothermic.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State and explain the effect of increasing the pressure on the yield of
ammonia in this reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
27) May 2017 [42] Q (3_b)
(b) The ammonia produced in the Haber process can be oxidised to
nitrogen(II) oxide at 900 °C.
The reaction is exothermic.
(i) Balance the chemical equation for this reaction.
 .....NO + .....H2O
4NH3 + .....O2 
[2]
(ii) Suggest a reason, other than cost, why a temperature greater than 900 °C
is not used.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest a reason why a temperature less than 900 °C is not used.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
28) Nov 2017 [41] Q (5_c)
(c) Nitrogen dioxide, NO2, exists in equilibrium with dinitrogen tetroxide, N2O4.
Nitrogen dioxide is brown and dinitrogen tetroxide is colourless.
 N2O4(g)
2NO2(g) 
brown colourless
(i) A sample of nitrogen dioxide and dinitrogen tetroxide at equilibrium was
placed in a closed gas syringe.
The syringe plunger was pushed in. This increased the pressure in the gas
syringe. The temperature was kept constant.

State how the colour of the gas in the syringe changed. Explain your answer
in terms of the position of the equilibrium.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) A sealed tube containing nitrogen dioxide and dinitrogen tetroxide at
equilibrium was cooled in an ice bath at constant pressure. The contents of
the tube became paler.
Suggest an explanation for this observation in terms of the position of the
equilibrium.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
29) Nov 2017 [42] Q (5)
5 Some chemical reactions are reversible.
(a) Aqueous potassium chromate(VI), K2CrO4, is a yellow solution.
Aqueous potassium dichromate(VI), K2Cr2O7, is an orange solution.
The two compounds interconvert when the pH of the solution changes.
 K 2Cr2O7 + K 2SO4 + H2O
2K 2CrO4 + H2SO4 
yellow orange
Solution Y is a mixture of aqueous potassium chromate(VI) and aqueous
potassium dichromate(VI) at equilibrium.
● Explain, in terms of the position of the equilibrium, what you would see if
sulfuric acid were added to solution Y.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
● Explain, in terms of the position of the equilibrium, what you would see if
sodium hydroxide were added to solution Y.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[5]

(b) Hydrogen can be manufactured using a reversible reaction between

methane and steam.
 CO(g) + 3H2(g)
CH4(g) + H2O(g) 
At 900 °C, in the presence of a nickel catalyst, the yield of hydrogen is 70%.
(i) What volume of hydrogen is produced from 100 cm3 of methane under
these conditions?
.............................. cm3 [2]

Under different conditions, different yields of hydrogen are obtained.
(ii) If the pressure is increased, the yield of hydrogen becomes less than 70%.
Explain why, in terms of the position of the equilibrium.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) If the temperature is decreased, the yield of hydrogen decreases.
What does this information indicate about the reaction between methane and
steam?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Why is a catalyst used in this reaction?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
30) May 2018 [42] Q (5)
5 Hydrogen and iodine react together in a reversible reaction. Hydrogen
iodide is formed.

A gas syringe containing an equilibrium mixture of hydrogen, iodine and
hydrogen iodide gases was sealed and heated to 250 °C. The equilibrium
mixture was a pale purple colour.

(a) What is meant by the term equilibrium?

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The plunger of the gas syringe was pressed in while the end of the gas
syringe was blocked.
This increased the pressure. The position of the equilibrium did not change.
The colour of the gaseous mixture turned darker purple.
(i) Give a reason why the position of the equilibrium did not change.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why the gaseous mixture turned darker purple, even though the
position of the equilibrium did not change.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The temperature of the gas syringe was increased to 300 °C.
(i) What happened to the position of the equilibrium when the temperature of
the gas syringe was increased from 250 °C to 300 °C?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What happened to the rate of the forward reaction and the rate of the
backward reaction when the temperature of the gas syringe was increased
from 250 °C to 300 °C?
rate of the forward reaction ................................................................................
rate of the backward reaction .............................................................................
[2]
31) May 2018 [43] Q (3_e, f)
(e) When cobalt(II) chloride is added to water an equilibrium is established.
(i) A student adds water to a blue solution containing [CoCl4]2– ions.

Describe what the student observes. Give a reason for your answer in terms
of the position of the equilibrium.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Another student cools a blue solution containing [CoCl4]2–. The blue
solution turns pink.
What does this information indicate about the forward reaction?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Another compound of cobalt is Co(OH)3.
Deduce the charge on the cobalt ion in Co(OH)3.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

214 9 – Acids, bases, salts and test of ions Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)
1) May 2010 [31] Q (8_b)

(b) In some areas when water is boiled, the inside of kettles becomes coated with
a layer of calcium carbonate. This can be removed by adding methanoic acid.
(i) Complete the equation
.......HCOOH + CaCO3 
→ Ca(HCOO)2 + .......... + ..........
[2]
(ii) Methanoic acid reacts with most metals above hydrogen in the reactivity
series.
Complete the word equation
zinc + methanoic acid 
→ ........................ + ..................... [2]
2) May 2010 [32] Q (6_a, b)
6 Thallium is a metal in Group III. It has oxidation states of +1 and +3.
(a) Give the formula for the following thallium compounds.
(i) thallium(I) sulfide ...................................................................................... [1]
(ii) thallium(III) chloride ................................................................................. [1]
(b) Thallium(I) chloride is insoluble in water. Complete the description of the
preparation of a pure sample of this salt.
Step 1
Mix a solution of sodium chloride with thallium(I) sulfate solution. A white
precipitate forms.
Step 2
....................................................................................................................... [1]
Step 3
....................................................................................................................... [1]
Step 4
....................................................................................................................... [1]
3) Nov 2010 [31] Q (8_a)
8 Soluble salts can be made using a base and an acid.
(a) Complete this method of preparing dry crystals of the soluble salt
Cobalt (II) chloride-6-water from the insoluble base cobalt (II) carbonate.
Step 1
Add an excess of cobalt(II) carbonate to hot dilute hydrochloric acid.
Step 2
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
Step 3
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
Step 4
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
4) Nov 2010 [32] Q (7_c)
7 The major use of sulfur dioxide is to manufacture sulfuric acid.
(c) (i) Define the term acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Sulfuric acid is a strong acid. Ethanedioic acid is a weak acid.
Given solutions of both acids, how could you show that sulfuric acid is a
strong acid and ethanedioic acid is a weak acid?
method ..............................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
result for each acid .............................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
5) May 2011 [31] Q (5_a, b, c)
5) Hydriodic acid HI(aq) is a strong acid, its salts are iodides
a) it has the reactions of a typical strong acid. Complete the following
equations
b) two of the reactions in (a) are acid/base and one is redox. Which one is
redox? Explain your choice
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
6) May 2011 [32] Q (7_b, ii, iii)

7 Chlorine reacts with phosphorus to form phosphorus trichloride.
(ii) Describe how you could show that phosphorus acid, H3PO3, is a weaker
acid than hydrochloric acid.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Two salts of phosphorus acid are its sodium salt, which is soluble in
water, and its calcium salt which is insoluble in water. Suggest a method of
preparation for each of these salts from aqueous phosphorus acid. Specify
any other reagent needed and briefly outline the method.
sodium salt .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
calcium salt ........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
7) Nov 2011 [31] Q (1_a)
1 This question is concerned with the following oxides.
sulfur dioxide
carbon monoxide
lithium oxide
aluminium oxide
nitrogen dioxide
strontium oxide
(a) (i) Which of the above oxides will react with hydrochloric acid but not with
aqueous sodium hydroxide?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which of the above oxides will react with aqueous sodium hydroxide but
not with hydrochloric acid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Which of the above oxides will react with both hydrochloric acid and
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which of the above oxides will not react with hydrochloric acid or with
....................................................................................................................... [1]
8) Nov 2011 [31] Q (5_b, C)

(b) Iron has two oxidation states +2 and +3. There are two possible equations
for the redox reaction between iron and bromine.
Fe + Br2 
 Fe2+ + 2Br –
2Fe + 3Br2 
 2Fe3+ + 6Br –
(i) Indicate, on the first equation, the change which is oxidation. Give a reason
for your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Which substance in the first equation is the reductant (reducing agent)?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe how you could test the solution to find out which ion, Fe2+ or
Fe3+, is present.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [3]
9) Nov 2011 [32] Q (6_a, b)
6 Soluble salts can be made by the neutralisation of an acid by a base.
Insoluble salts can be made by precipitation.
(a) The following is a brief description of the preparation of the soluble salt,
nickel(II) chloride-6-water, from the insoluble base nickel(II) carbonate.
Nickel(II) carbonate is added in small amounts to hot dilute hydrochloric acid
until it is in excess. The mixture is filtered. The filtrate is partially evaporated
and then allowed to cool until crystals of nickel(II) chloride-6-water form.
(i) Why is it necessary to use excess carbonate?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why it is necessary to filter.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why partially evaporate rather than evaporate to dryness?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) What additional steps are needed to obtain dry crystals?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Potassium chloride can be made from hydrochloric acid and potassium
carbonate.
(i) Why must a different experimental method be used for this preparation?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give a description of the different method used for this salt preparation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
10) Nov 2011 [33] Q (3_d)
(d) The soluble compound, calcium dihydrogenphosphate is made by heating
the insoluble mineral rock phosphate, Ca3(PO4)2, with sulfuric acid.
(i) Why would rock phosphate not be effective as a fertiliser?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The phosphate ion, PO34− , from the rock phosphate is changed into the
dihydrogenphosphate ion, H2PO4
PO34− + 2 H2SO4 
→ H2PO−4 + 2HSO−4
What type of reagent is the phosphate ion? Give a reason for your choice.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
11) May 2012 [31] Q (2)

2 Three ways of making salts are
• titration using a soluble base or carbonate
• neutralisation using an insoluble base or carbonate
• precipitation.
(a) Complete the following table of salt preparations.
Method Reagent 1 Reagent 2 salt
…………………... …………………...
Titration Sodium nitrate
…………………... …………………...
…………………...
Neutralization Nitric acid Copper(II) nitrate
…………………...
…………………... …………………...
Precipitation Silver(I) chloride
…………………... …………………...
…………………...
Neutralization Sulfuric acid Zinc(II) carbonate
…………………...
[6]
(b) (i) Write an ionic equation with state symbols for the preparation of silver(I)
chloride.
…………………………………………………………………………………….…[2]
(ii) Complete the following equation.
ZnCO3 + H2SO4 
→ .......... + .......... + ..........
[2]
12) May 2012 [32] Q (4_a, iii)
4 The ore of aluminium is bauxite which is impure aluminium oxide. Alumina,
pure aluminium oxide, is obtained from bauxite.
Aluminium is formed at the cathode when a molten mixture of alumina and
cryolite, Na3AlF6, is electrolysed.
(iii) The major impurity in bauxite is iron(III) oxide. Iron(III) oxide is basic,
aluminium oxide is amphoteric. Explain how aqueous sodium hydroxide can
be used to separate them.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
13) May 2012 [32] Q (8)

8 Ethylamine, CH3–CH2–NH2, is a base which has similar properties to
ammonia.
(a) In aqueous ethylamine, there is the following equilibrium.
→ CH3 − CH2 − NH+3 + OH−
CH3 − CH2 − NH2 + H2O 
Explain why water is behaving as an acid in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Given aqueous solutions of ethylamine and sodium hydroxide, describe
how you could show that ethylamine is a weak base like ammonia and not a
strong base like sodium hydroxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Ethylamine, like ammonia, reacts with acids to form salts.
CH3 − CH2 − NH2 + HCl 
→ CH3 − CH2 − NH3Cl
ethylammonium chloride
Suggest how you could displace ethylamine from the salt, ethylammonium
chloride.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Explain the chemistry of the following reaction:
When aqueous ethylamine is added to aqueous iron(III) chloride, a brown
precipitate is formed.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
14) Nov 2012 [31] Q (4_b, c)
4 Silicon(IV) oxide, SiO2, and zirconium(IV) oxide, ZrO2, are both
macromolecules.
They have similar physical properties but silicon(IV) oxide is acidic and
zirconium(IV) oxide is amphoteric.
(b) (i) Predict three physical properties of these two oxides.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name an element which has the same physical properties as these two
oxides.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) Name a reagent that reacts with the oxides of both elements.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name a reagent that reacts with only one of the oxides.
reagent ...............................................................................................................
oxide which reacts ........................................................................................ [2]
15) Nov 2012 [31] Q (7_b)
(b) Strontium chloride-6-water can be made from the insoluble compound,
strontium carbonate, by the following reactions.
SrCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq) 
→ SrCl2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)
SrCl2(aq) + 6H2O(l) 
→ SrCl 2.6H2O(s)
The following method was used to prepare the crystals.
1 Add excess strontium carbonate to hot hydrochloric acid.
2 Filter the resulting mixture.
3 Partially evaporate the filtrate and allow to cool.
4 Filter off the crystals of SrCl 2.6H2O.
5 Dry the crystals between filter papers.
(i) How would you know when excess strontium carbonate had been added in
step 1?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why is it necessary to filter the mixture in step 2?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) In step 3, why partially evaporate the filtrate rather than evaporate to
dryness?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
16) Nov 2012 [33] Q (6_a, i, d, ii)

6 Until recently, arsenic poisoning, either deliberate or accidental, has been a
frequent cause of death. The symptoms of arsenic poisoning are identical with
those of a common illness, cholera. A reliable test was needed to prove the
presence of arsenic in a body.
(a) In 1840, Marsh devised a reliable test for arsenic.
Hydrogen is formed in this reaction. Any arsenic compound reacts with this
hydrogen to form arsine which is arsenic hydride, AsH3.
The mixture of hydrogen and arsine is burnt at the jet and arsenic forms as a
black stain on the glass.
(i) Write an equation for the reaction which forms hydrogen.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) In the 19th Century, a bright green pigment, copper(II) arsenate(V) was
used to kill rats and insects. In damp conditions, micro-organisms can act on
this compound to produce the very poisonous gas, arsine.
(ii) The formula for the arsenate(V) ion is AsO34− . Complete the ionic equation
for the formation of copper(II) arsenate(V).
..... Cu2+ + ...... AsO34− 
→ ..................................
17) May 2013 [31] Q (2_e)
2 (e) The hydroxide of M is a white powder which is insoluble in water.
Describe how you could show that this hydroxide is amphoteric.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
18) May 2013 [31] Q (3_b)

(b) The equation for the reaction in experiment 1 is:
CaCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) 
→ CaCl 2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)
Complete the following ionic equation.
CaCO3(s) + 2H+(aq) 
→ ............ + ............ + ............
[1]
19) May 2013 [31] Q (6_a, c, e)
6 Ammonia is a compound which only contains the elements nitrogen and
hydrogen. It is a weak base.
(a) (i) Define the term base.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Given aqueous solutions of ammonia and sodium hydroxide, both having a
concentration of 0.1 mol / dm3, how could you show that ammonia is the
weaker base?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Another compound which contains only nitrogen and hydrogen is
hydrazine, N2H4.
Complete the equation for the preparation of hydrazine from ammonia.
.....NH3 + NaClO 
→ N2H4 + ............ + H2O
[2]
(e) Hydrazine is a weak base and it removes dissolved oxygen from water. It
is added to water in steel boilers to prevent rusting.
(i) One way it reduces the rate of rusting is by changing the pH of water.
What effect would hydrazine have on the pH of water?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give a reason, other than pH, why hydrazine reduces the rate of rusting.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
20) May 2013 [31] Q (7_a)

7 The hydroxides of the Group I metals are soluble in water. Most other metal
hydroxides are insoluble in water.
(a) (i) Crystals of lithium chloride can be prepared from lithium hydroxide by
titration.
25.0 cm3 of aqueous lithium hydroxide is pipetted into the conical flask.
A few drops of an indicator are added. Dilute hydrochloric acid is added slowly
to the alkali until the indicator just changes colour. The volume of acid needed
to neutralize the lithium hydroxide is noted.
A neutral solution of lithium chloride, which still contains the indicator, is left.
Describe how you could obtain a neutral solution of lithium chloride which
does not contain an indicator.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) You cannot prepare a neutral solution of magnesium chloride by the same
method.
Describe how you could prepare a neutral solution of magnesium chloride.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
21) May 2013 [33] Q (6_b, c)

6 (b) (i) Suggest why a solution of malonic acid, concentration 0.2 mol / dm3,
has a higher pH than one of sulfuric acid of the same concentration.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe a test, other than measuring pH, which can be carried out on both
acid solutions to confirm the explanation given in (b)(i) for the different pH
values of the two acids.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Complete the following equations for reactions of these two acids.
(i) sodium hydroxide + malonic acid 
→ .................... + .................... [1]
....................
22) Nov 2013 [31] Q (6_b)

(b) Basic lead(II) carbonate is heated in the apparatus shown below. Water
and carbon dioxide are produced.
(i) Silica gel absorbs water. Silica gel often contains anhydrous cobalt(II)
chloride.
When this absorbs water it changes from blue to pink.
Suggest a reason.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Soda lime is a mixture of sodium hydroxide and calcium oxide. Why do
these two substances react with carbon dioxide?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name two substances formed when soda lime reacts with carbon dioxide.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
23) Nov 2013 [32] Q (5_b)
(b) These questions refer to the preparation of the salt.
(i) Why is it necessary to filter the mixture after mixing and stirring?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the purpose of washing the precipitate?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why leave the precipitate in a warm oven?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) Explain why the concentrations of silver(I) nitrate and potassium
chromate(VI) are different.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
24) Nov 2013 [33] Q (1_c)
1 (c) It is possible to determine whether zirconium(IV) oxide is acidic, neutral,
basic or amphoteric using an acid and an alkali. Complete the table of
possible results. If the oxide is predicted to react write ‘R’, if it is predicted not
to react write ‘NR’.
25) Nov 2013 [33] Q (4_c, d)

(c) Complete the following equations.
(d) (i) Sulfuric acid is a strong acid.

You are given aqueous sulfuric acid, concentration 0.1 mol/dm3, and aqueous
hexanesulfonic acid, concentration 0.2 mol/dm3. Describe how you could
show that hexanesulfonic acid is also a strong acid.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Deduce why, for a fair comparison, the two acid solutions must have
different concentrations.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain the terms strong acid and weak acid.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
26) May 2014 [32] Q (6_c)
(c) Scandium oxide is insoluble in water. Describe how you could show that it
is an amphoteric oxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
27) May 2014 [32] Q (7_a)
7 The soluble salt hydrated lithium sulfate is made by titration from the soluble
base lithium hydroxide.
(a) The sulfuric acid is added slowly from the burette until the indicator just
changes colour. The volume of sulfuric acid needed to just neutralise the
lithium hydroxide is noted.
Describe how you would continue the experiment to obtain pure dry crystals
of hydrated lithium sulfate.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
28) Nov 2014 [31] Q (1)
1 (a) Match the following pH values to the solutions given below.
1 3 7 10 13
The solutions all have the same concentration.
solution pH
aqueous ammonia, a weak base …………
dilute hydrochloric acid, a strong acid …………
aqueous sodium hydroxide, a strong base …………
aqueous sodium chloride, a salt …………
dilute ethanoic acid, a weak acid …………
[5]
(b) Explain why solutions of hydrochloric acid and ethanoic acid with the same
concentration, in mol / dm3, have a different pH.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Measuring pH is one way of distinguishing between a strong acid and a
weak acid.
Describe another method.
method ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
results ................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[2]
29) Nov 2014 [32] Q (2_c, ii)

(ii) This ore is a mixture of aluminium oxide, which is amphoteric, and iron(III)
oxide which is basic.
Explain how these two oxides can be separated by the addition of aqueous
sodium hydroxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
30) Nov 2014 [33] Q (6_b, i)
(b) Strontium carbonate is similar to calcium carbonate. It is insoluble in water
and it decomposes when heated. Rubidium carbonate is soluble in water and
does not decompose when heated.
(i) Describe a method to prepare a pure sample of the insoluble salt, strontium
carbonate, by precipitation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
31) Nov 2014 [33] Q (8_b)
(b) Complete the description of the preparation of crystals of the soluble salt,
cobalt(II) chloride-6-water, CoCl2.6H2O, from the insoluble base, cobalt(II)
carbonate.
50 cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid, concentration 2.2 mol / dm3, was heated
and cobalt(II) carbonate was added in small amounts until ...............................
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………….…[4]
32) May 2015 [31] Q (6_a, b)

6 Acid-base reactions are examples of proton transfer.
(a) Ethylamine is a weak base and sodium hydroxide is a strong base.
(i) In terms of proton transfer, explain what is meant by the term weak base.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Given aqueous solutions of both bases, describe how you could show that
sodium hydroxide is the stronger base. How could you ensure a ‘fair’
comparison between the two solutions?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Ethylamine reacts with acids to form salts.
CH3CH2NH2 + HCl 
→ CH3CH2NH3Cl
ethylammonium chloride
(i) Complete the equation for the reaction between sulfuric acid and
ethylamine. Name the salt formed.
......CH3CH2NH2 + ............ 
→ .........................
name of salt .................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) Amines and their salts have similar chemical properties to ammonia and
ammonium salts.
Suggest a reagent that could be used to displace the weak base, ethylamine,
from its salt ethylammonium chloride.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
33) May 2015 [32] Q (5)
5 Three common methods of preparing salts are shown below.
method A adding an excess of an insoluble base or carbonate or metal to a
dilute acid and removing excess by filtration
method B using a burette and indicator
method C mixing two solutions to obtain the salt by precipitation
For each of the following salt preparations, choose a method, A, B or C.
Name any additional reagent which is needed and complete the equation.
(a) the soluble salt, nickel chloride, from the insoluble compound nickel
carbonate
method ...............................................................................................................
reagent ...............................................................................................................
word equation ....................................................................................................
[3]
(b) the insoluble salt, lead(II) bromide, from aqueous lead(II) nitrate
method ...............................................................................................................
reagent ...............................................................................................................
ionic equation ........ + ........ 
→ PbBr2
[3]
(c) the soluble salt, lithium sulfate, from the soluble base lithium hydroxide
method ...............................................................................................................
reagent ...............................................................................................................
equation .............................................................................................................
[4]
34) May 2015 [33] Q (2)
2 This question is concerned with the following oxides.
aluminium oxide
carbon monoxide
copper(II) oxide
silicon(IV) oxide
sodium oxide
sulfur dioxide
zinc oxide
Choose one oxide from the above list to match each of the following
descriptions. An oxide may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) This oxide does not react with acid or alkali. ........................................... [1]
(b) This oxide reacts with water to give a strong alkali solution. ................... [1]
(c) This oxide is used as a bleach. ............................................................... [1]
(d) This oxide is amphoteric. ......................................................................... [1]
(e) This oxide has a giant covalent structure. ............................................... [1]
(f) This oxide is soluble in water and it is acidic ......................... .................. [1]
35) May 2015 [33] Q (4_b, iii, iv)

(iii) Nitric acid contains nitrate ions.
Describe a test for nitrate ions.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain how you could determine which one of two samples of acid rain
had the higher concentration of hydrogen ions.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
36) Nov 2015 [31] Q (6_a, iii)
(iii) How could you show that silicon(IV) oxide is acidic and not basic or
amphoteric?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
37) Nov 2015 [32] Q (6_g)
(g) Describe how you could show that magnesium oxide is a basic oxide and
not an amphoteric oxide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
38) Nov 2015 [33] Q (5)
5 Sulfuric acid is a strong acid. In aqueous solution, it ionises as shown
below.
→ 2H+ + SO4 2−
H2SO4 
(a) (i) What is meant by the term acid ?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Sulfurous acid, H2SO3, is a weak acid.
State the difference between a weak acid and a strong acid.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) sulfurous acid forms salts called sulfites, which contain the ion SO32–
When barium nitrate solution is added to aqueous sulfurous acid, a white
precipitate, A, forms.
Bromine water changes from brown to colourless when added to aqueous
sulfurous acid.
Bromine oxidises sulfurous acid. When this solution is tested with acidified
barium nitrate solution, a different white precipitate, B, is formed.
(i) Identify the white precipitate, A.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify the white precipitate, B.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write an ionic equation for the reduction of the bromine molecule.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Name the product formed by the oxidation of sulfurous acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the following word equations.
(i) magnesium hydroxide + dilute sulfuric acid
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) zinc + dilute sulfuric acid
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) copper carbonate + dilute sulfuric acid
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Write equations for the reaction of dilute sulfuric acid with each of the
following.
(i) ammonia
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) sodium hydroxide
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) iron
....................................................................................................................... [2]
39) Nov 2015 [33] Q (7_b, c)

7 Two salts can be made from potassium hydroxide and sulfuric acid. They
are potassium sulfate, K2SO4, and the acid salt potassium hydrogen sulfate,
KHSO4. They are both made by titration.
(b) in the conical flask there is a neutral solution of potassium sulfate which
still contains indicator used in the titration.
(i) Describe how you could obtain a solution of potassium sulfate without the
indicator.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Potassium hydrogen sulfate can be made by the following reaction.
KOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) 
→ KHSO4(aq) + H2O(l)
Suggest how you could make a solution of potassium hydrogen sulfate
without using an indicator.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe a test which would distinguish between aqueous solutions of
potassium sulfate and sulfuric acid.
test .....................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
[2]
40) May 2016 [41] Q (2_b, c)

(b) Magnesium reacts slowly with warm water to form a base, magnesium
hydroxide.
(i) Explain what is meant by the term base.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between magnesium and warm
water.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Aluminium oxide is amphoteric. It is insoluble in water.
Describe experiments to show that aluminium oxide is amphoteric.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
41) May 2016 [41] Q (5_d, e)
(d) Dilute sulfuric acid is a typical acid.
A student adds excess dilute sulfuric acid to a sample of solid copper(II)
carbonate in a test-tube.
(i) Give three observations the student would make.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give the names of all products formed.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Concentrated sulfuric acid has different properties to dilute sulfuric acid.
When concentrated sulfuric acid is added to glucose, C6H12O6, steam is given
off and a black solid is formed.
(i) Name the black solid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of reaction has occurred?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
42) May 2016 [42] Q (3_c)

(c) Gallium(III) oxide, Ga2O3, is amphoteric.
(i) Write the chemical equation for the reaction between gallium(III) oxide and
dilute nitric acid to form a salt and water only.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The reaction between gallium(III) oxide and sodium hydroxide solution
forms only water and a salt containing the negative ion Ga2O42–.
Write the chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
43) May 2016 [42] Q (6_d, i)
(d) When a sample of steel is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, an aqueous
solution of iron(II) chloride, FeCl2, is formed.
When a sample of rust is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, an aqueous
solution of iron(III) chloride, FeCl3, is formed.
(i) Aqueous sodium hydroxide is added to the solutions of iron(II) chloride and
iron(III) chloride.
Complete the table below, showing the observations you would expect to
make.
iron(II) chloride solution iron(III) chloride solution
aqueous
sodium hydroxide
[2]
44) May 2016 [43] Q (4_b)
(b) Potassium iodide and lead nitrate are both soluble. Lead iodide is
insoluble.
(i) Describe how a pure dry sample of lead iodide could be made from solid
potassium iodide and solid lead nitrate.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Write an ionic equation for the formation of lead iodide, PbI2, when
potassium iodide and lead nitrate react with each other.
State symbols are not required.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
45) May 2016 [43] Q (6_b)
(b) Some of the white solid is removed from the tube and dissolved in water.
Describe how the white solid could be tested to show it contains,
(i) ammonium ions,
test .....................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) chloride ions.
test .....................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
46) Nov 2016 [42] Q (4)
4 Dilute nitric acid behaves as a typical acid in some reactions but not in other
reactions.
(a) Dilute nitric acid behaves as a typical acid when reacted with copper(II)
oxide and with copper(II) carbonate.
Describe what you would see if excess dilute nitric acid is added separately to
solid samples of copper(II) carbonate and copper(II) oxide followed by
warming the mixtures.
copper(II) carbonate
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
copper(II) oxide
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) When dilute nitric acid is added to pieces of copper and heated, a reaction
takes place and copper(II) nitrate is formed.
(i) Part of the chemical equation for the reaction between copper and dilute
nitric acid is shown.
Complete the chemical equation by inserting the formula of copper(II) nitrate
and balancing the equation.
......Cu(s) + 8HNO3(aq) 
→ .........................(aq) + 4H2O(l) + 2NO(g)
[2]
(ii) How is the reaction of dilute nitric acid with copper different from that of a
typical metal with a typical acid?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
47) Nov 2016 [42] Q (5_e, ii)
(ii) The oxide of iodine in (e)(i) dissolves in water.
Predict and explain the effect of adding Universal Indicator to an aqueous
solution of this oxide of iodine.
effect on Universal Indicator
................................................................................................
explanation
..........................................................................................................................
[2]
48) Nov 2016 [43] Q (2_d)
(d) Beryllium hydroxide is amphoteric.
Beryllium hydroxide reacts with acids. The salts formed contain positive
beryllium ions.
(i) Give the formula of the positive beryllium ion.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between beryllium hydroxide
and hydrochloric acid.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Beryllium hydroxide also reacts with alkalis. The salts formed contain
beryllate ions, BeO22–.
Suggest a chemical equation for the reaction between beryllium hydroxide
and sodium hydroxide solution.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
49) Nov 2016 [43] Q (5_f)

(f) Sulfuric acid reacts with a hydrocarbon called benzene to produce
benzenesulfonic acid, C6H5SO3H. Benzenesulfonic acid is a strong acid which
ionises to produce hydrogen ions, H+, and benzenesulfonate ions, C6H5SO3–.
(i) What is meant by the term strong acid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how to show that a 1 mol / dm3 solution of benzenesulfonic acid
is a strong acid.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between benzenesulfonic acid
and sodium carbonate, Na2CO3.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
50) May 2017 [41] Q (2_a)
2 Some oxides of some elements are listed.
(a) Answer the following questions using only oxides from the list. Each oxide
Give the formula of an oxide
(ii) which would give a solution of pH 14 when added to water, .........................
(v) which is amphoteric, .....................................................................................
(vi) which is neutral. ...........................................................................................
[6]
(b) Amphoteric oxides and neutral oxides are different from each other.
(i) What is meant by the term amphoteric oxide?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is meant by the term neutral oxide?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
51) May 2017 [41] Q (3_a, c, d)

3 Magnesium sulfate and lead(II) sulfate are examples of salts.
(a) A student prepared magnesium sulfate crystals starting from magnesium
carbonate. The student carried out the experiment in four steps.
step 1 The student added excess magnesium carbonate to a small volume
of dilute sulfuric acid until no more magnesium carbonate would react.
step 2 The student filtered the mixture.
step 3 The student heated the filtrate obtained from step 2 until it was
saturated.
step 4 The student allowed the hot filtrate to cool to room temperature and
then removed the crystals which formed.
(i) How did the student know when the reaction had finished in step 1?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the residue in step 2.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) A saturated solution forms in step 3.
What is a saturated solution?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain why magnesium sulfate crystals form during step 4.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Lead(II) sulfate, PbSO4, is insoluble.
Describe how you would prepare a pure dry sample of lead(II) sulfate crystals
starting from solutions of lead(II) nitrate and sodium sulfate.
Include a series of key steps in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) Write the ionic equation for the reaction which takes place between
solutions of lead(II) nitrate and sodium sulfate.
Include state symbols.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
52) May 2017 [42] Q (3_d)

(d) Describe how you would prepare a pure dry sample of copper(II) nitrate
crystals in the laboratory using dilute nitric acid and solid copper(II) carbonate.
Include a series of key steps in your answer.
You should include a chemical equation for the reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [6]
53) May 2017 [42] Q (4_b)
(b) Copper(II) oxide is a basic oxide but zinc oxide is an amphoteric oxide.
Both oxides are insoluble in water.
You are provided with a mixture of solid copper(II) oxide and solid zinc oxide.
Describe how you would obtain a sample of copper(II) oxide from this mixture.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
54) May 2017 [43] Q (6_b)
(b) Aqueous sodium carbonate is added to aqueous barium nitrate.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the reaction of aqueous sodium carbonate
with aqueous barium nitrate.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe how a pure sample of barium carbonate could be obtained from
the resulting mixture.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
55) Nov 2017 [41] Q (4_d)

(d) Ethanoic acid is a weak acid.
(i) When referring to an acid, what is meant by the term weak?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how you could show that ethanoic acid is a weaker acid than
hydrochloric acid.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
56) Nov 2017 [41] Q (5_b, i)
(b) Copper(II) carbonate reacts with dilute nitric acid. One of the products of
the reaction is a solution of copper(II) nitrate.
(i) Describe tests for copper(II) ions and nitrate ions. Include the results of the
tests.
copper(II) ions ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
Nitrate ions .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[4]
57) Nov 2017 [43] Q (3_d, e)
(d) (i) When iron is added to dilute sulfuric acid, an aqueous solution of iron(II)
sulfate is formed as one of the products.
Write a chemical equation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When iron(III) oxide is added to dilute sulfuric acid, an aqueous solution of
iron(III) sulfate is formed as one of the products.
Write a chemical equation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) Aqueous sodium hydroxide, aqueous potassium iodide and aqueous

acidified potassium manganate(VII) are added to aqueous solutions of iron(II)
sulfate and iron(III) sulfate.
● Iron(II) ions, Fe2+, are reducing agents in aqueous solution.
● Iron(III) ions, Fe3+, are oxidising agents in aqueous solution.
Complete the table.
[4]
58) May 2018 [42] Q (6_a)
6 (a) All sodium salts are soluble in water. All nitrates are soluble in water.
Barium carbonate is insoluble in water.
Describe how you would make a pure, dry sample of barium carbonate by
precipitation.
Include:
● the names of the starting materials
● full practical details
● a chemical equation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
59) May 2018 [43] Q (3_d, i)
(d) Cobalt reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to make the salt cobalt(II)
chloride. Bubbles of hydrogen gas are produced.
(i) Describe a test for hydrogen.
test .....................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
[2]
60) May 2018 [43] Q (6_c)

(c) Chloric(V) acid, HClO3, is a strong acid. It can be made from calcium
chlorate(V).
(i) What colour is methyl orange indicator in chloric(V) acid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Define the term acid in terms of proton transfer.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the chemical equation to show HClO3 behaving as an acid in
water.
HClO3 + H2O 
→ ....................... + .......................
[1]
246 10 – Periodic Table Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (1_ii, iii, v)

1 Choose an element which fits each of the following descriptions.
(ii) This element is a black solid which, when heated, forms a purple vapour
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Most of its soluble salts are blue.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) It is an unreactive gas used to fill balloons.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
2) May 2010 [31] Q (7_a, d)
7 Titanium is a transition element. It is isolated by the following reactions.
(a) Why is it usually necessary to include a number in the name of the

compounds of transition elements?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Complete the table which shows some of the properties of titanium and its
uses.
The first line has been completed as an example.
Property Related use
Soluble in molten steel Making steel titanium alloys
…………………………………………... Making aircraft and space vehicles
Resistance to corrosion, especially in …………………………………………...

sea water
[2]
3) May 2010 [32] Q (1)
1 For each of the following unfamiliar elements predict one physical and one
chemical property.
(a) caesium (Cs)
physical property ................................................................................................
chemical property ...............................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) vanadium (V)

....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) fluorine (F)
....................................................................................................................... [2]
4) Nov 2010 [31] Q (6_a)
6 The table below shows the elements in the second period of the Periodic
Table and some of their oxidation states in their most common compounds.
(a) (i) What does it mean when the only oxidation state of an element is zero?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why some elements have positive oxidation states but others have
negative ones.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Select two elements in the table which exist as diatomic molecules of the
type X2.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
5) Nov 2010 [32] Q (4_a)
4 Chromium is a transition element.
(a) (i) Predict two differences in the physical properties of chromium and
sodium.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Predict two differences in the chemical properties of chromium and
sodium.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

6) May 2011 [32] Q (1)

1 Choose an element from the list below which best fits the description
Rb Fe Si I P Sr
(a) An element which reacts with cold water. ............... [1]

(b) It is a solid at room temperature and exists as diatomic molecules, X2 ... [1]
(c) It can form two oxides, XO and X2O3. ............... [1]
(d) This element has a hydride of the type XH3. ............... [1]
(e) It has a macromolecular structure similar to that of carbon. ............... [1]
7) Nov 2011 [33] Q (1)
1 Use your copy of the Periodic Table to answer these questions.
(a) Choose an element from the Periodic Table to match each description.
You may give either the name or the symbol.
(i) It is the most reactive metal. ..................................................................... [1]
(ii) It is the only non-metal which is a liquid at r.t.p........................................ [1]
(iii) An isotope of this element is used as a fuel in nuclear reactors. ............ [1]
(iv) This Group VII element is a solid at r.t.p................................................. [1]
(v) This element is in Group V and Period 4. ................................................ [1]
(vi) This unreactive gas is used to fill lamps. ................................................ [1]
(b) Predict the formula of each of the following compounds.
(i) germanium oxide ...........................................................................................
(ii) tellurium bromide ..................................................................................... [2]
(c) Give the formula of each of the following ions.
(i) strontium ........................................................................................................
(ii) fluoride ..................................................................................................... [2]
8) May 2012 [31] Q (3)
3 The Group I metals show trends in both their physical and chemical
properties.
(a) (i) How do their melting points vary down the Group?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which element in the Group has the highest density?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) All Group I metals react with cold water. Complete the following equation.
........Rb + ........H2O 
→ ................ + ................
[2]

(b) Lithium reacts with nitrogen to form the ionic compound, lithium nitride.
(i) State the formula of the lithium ion. .............…….. [1]
(ii) Deduce the formula of the nitride ion. .............…….. [1]
(iii) In all solid ionic compounds, the ions are held together in a lattice.
Explain the term lattice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) What is the ratio of lithium ions to nitride ions in the lattice of lithium
nitride?
........ lithium ions : ........ nitride ions
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
9) May 2012 [31] Q (4_a, b)
4 Vanadium is a transition element. It has more than one oxidation state.
The element and its compounds are often used as catalysts.
(a) Complete the electron distribution of vanadium by inserting one number.
2 + 8 + .......... + 2
[1]
(b) Predict three physical properties of vanadium which are typical of
transition elements.
1. ........................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................
3. ................................................................................................................... [2]
10) May 2012 [32] Q (1_a, b)
1 The table below includes information about some of the elements in Period 2.
(a) Why does neon exist as single atoms but fluorine exists as molecules?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) What determines the order of the elements in a period?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
11) Nov 2012 [31] Q (2_a)
2 Three of the halogens in Group VII are listed below.
chlorine
bromine
iodine
(a) (i) How does their colour change down the Group?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) How do their melting points and boiling points change down the Group?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Predict the colour and physical state (solid, liquid or gas) of astatine, At.
colour .................................................................................................................
physical state ................................................................................................ [2]
12) Nov 2012 [32] Q (1_a, b)
1 This question is concerned with the elements in Period 5, Rb to Xe.
(a) The electron distributions of some of these elements are given in the
following list.
element A 2 + 8 + 18 + 8 + 2
element B 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 8
element C 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 5
element D 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 6
element E 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 4
element F 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 7
(i) Identify element C. .................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which element in the list does not form any compounds?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Which element in the list forms a chloride of the type XCl2?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which two elements would react together to form a compound of the type
XY4?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Which element in the list would react with cold water to form an alkaline
solution and hydrogen?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Predict two differences in physical properties and two differences in

chemical properties between rubidium and the transition metal niobium.
physical ..............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
chemical .............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
13) Nov 2012 [33] Q (1)
1 For each of the following, select an element from Period 4, potassium to
krypton, which matches the description.
(a) A metal that reacts rapidly with cold water to form a compound of the type
M(OH)2 and hydrogen.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Its only oxidation state is 0....................................................................... [1]
(c) It has a macromolecular oxide, XO2, which has similar physical properties
to those of diamond.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) This is one of the metals alloyed with iron in stainless steel. .................. [1]
(e) It can be reduced to an ion of the type X–. .............................................. [1]
(f) It can form a covalent hydride having the formula H2X. ........................... [1]
(g) Its soluble salts are blue and its oxide is black. ....................................... [1]
(h) It is a liquid at room temperature. ............................................................ [1]
14) Nov 2013 [31] Q (2_a)
2 (a) Give three differences in physical properties between the Group I metal,
potassium, and the transition element, iron.
1. ........................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................
3. ................................................................................................................... [3]
15) Nov 2013 [32] Q (2_a)
2 The halogens are a collection of diatomic non-metals in Group VII.
(a) (i) Define the term diatomic.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What do the electron distributions of the halogens have in common?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) How do their electron distributions differ?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Complete the table.
[2]
16) May 2014 [31] Q (4_b)
(b) Across a period, the elements change from metallic to non-metallic.
(i) Describe how the type of oxide changes across this period.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe how the type of bonding in the chlorides formed by these
elements changes across this period.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
17) May 2014 [32] Q (6_a)
6 Scandium, proton number 21, is not a typical transition element.
(a) Scandium is a low density metal which has only one oxidation state in its
compounds. Scandium compounds are white solids which form colourless
solutions. Titanium, the next metal in the period, is a far more typical transition
element. How would the properties of titanium differ from those of scandium?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

18) Nov 2014 [33] Q (1)

1 For each of the following elements give one physical property and one
chemical property.
(a) bromine (Br2)
[2]
(b) carbon graphite (C)
[2]
(c) manganese (Mn)
[2]
19) Nov 2014 [33] Q (6_a)
6 Rubidium and strontium are very reactive metals at the top of the reactivity
series. Because their ions have different charges, their compounds behave
differently when heated.
(a) The formulae of the ions of these two elements are Rb+ and Sr2+.
Explain why these metals, which are in different groups, form ions which have
different charges.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
20) May 2015 [31] Q (5_a)
5 The halogens are a group of non-metals in Group VII of the Periodic Table.
(a) The reactivity of the halogens decreases down the group.
Describe an experiment which shows that chlorine is more reactive than
iodine. Include an equation in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

21) Nov 2015 [32] Q (6)

6 The table below shows the elements in the third period of the Periodic
Table, the number of electrons in their outer energy level, their oxidation state
in their common compounds and their melting points.
(a) Describe and explain the variation in oxidation state across the period.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The first three elements, Na, Mg and Al, are metals.
Describe the structure of a typical metal.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Explain why Na, Mg and Al are good conductors of electricity.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which element exists as diatomic molecules of the type X2?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Silicon has a similar structure to diamond.
Explain why silicon has the highest melting point in the period.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(f) Sodium chloride is a crystalline solid with a high melting point. It dissolves
in water to give a neutral solution. Phosphorus trichloride is a liquid at room
temperature. It reacts with water to form an acidic solution.
Suggest an explanation for these differences in properties.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

22) Nov 2015 [33] Q (6_f)

(f) Manganese is a typical transition metal.
Predict three physical and two chemical properties of this metal.
physical properties
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
chemical properties
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[5]
23) May 2016 [41] Q (2_h)
(h) Argon is an unreactive noble gas.
(i) Explain why argon is unreactive.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give one use of argon.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
24) May 2016 [41] Q (4_c)
(c) Copper, nickel and silver are transition elements.
Typical physical properties of transition elements are a high density and a
high melting point.
Give three different properties of transition metals which are not typical of
other metals.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
25) May 2016 [42] Q (1_a)
1 (a) For each of the following, give the name of an element from Period 2
(lithium to neon), which matches the description.
Elements may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(i) an element which is gaseous at room temperature and pressure
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) an element which forms an oxide that is a reactant in photosynthesis
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) an element that is a product of photosynthesis

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) an element that makes up approximately 78% by volume of the air
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) an element which has atoms with a full outer shell of electrons
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) an element which exists as both diamond and graphite
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(vii) an element that reacts vigorously with cold water
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(viii) a soft metallic element which is stored in oil
....................................................................................................................... [1]
26) May 2016 [43] Q (4_c)
(c) When chlorine gas is bubbled through an aqueous solution of potassium
iodide, a redox reaction takes place.
2I− + Cl2 
→ I2 + 2Cl−
(i) State the colour change expected in this reaction.
start colour .........................................................................................................
end colour ..........................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Identify the reducing agent in this reaction. Explain your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
27) Nov 2016 [42] Q (5_b)
(b) A student bubbled chlorine gas into a test-tube containing aqueous
potassium bromide.
(i) Describe the colour change seen in the test-tube.
from ....................................................... to ........................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the ionic equation for this reaction.
Include state symbols.
Cl2(g) + ......Br–(aq) 
→ ................ + ................
[3]

28) May 2017 [41] Q (2_a)

(iii) which is coloured, ....................................................................................[1]

29) May 2017 [42] Q (4_a)
4 Nickel, copper and zinc are three consecutive elements in the Periodic
Table.
(a) Nickel and copper are transition elements.
State three chemical properties of transition elements.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
30) May 2017 [42] Q (5_a, c)
5 (a) The elements in Group VII are known as the halogens. Some halogens
react with aqueous solutions of halides.
(i) Complete the table by adding a  to indicate when a reaction occurs and a
 to indicate when no reaction occurs.
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between chlorine and aqueous
potassium bromide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Astatine is at the bottom of Group VII. Use your knowledge of the
properties of the halogens to
(i) predict the physical state of astatine at room temperature and pressure,
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) write a chemical equation for the reaction between sodium and astatine.
....................................................................................................................... [2]

31) May 2017 [43] Q (2_c)

(c) The boiling point of bromine is 59 °C and the boiling point of iodine is 184
°C.
Explain why iodine has a higher boiling point than bromine.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
32) May 2018 [41] Q (5_a, b)
5 (a) The table gives some chemical properties of transition elements and
their compounds, and of
Group I elements and their compounds
(i) What is meant by the term catalyst?

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give one other chemical property shown by transition elements which is
not shown by Group I elements.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Give two physical properties shown by transition elements which are not
shown by Group I elements.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]

33) May 2018 [42] Q (2_b, c, d, e)


(b) is extracted from the ore bauxite
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) is soft, metallic and stored in oil
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) is a green gas at room temperature and pressure
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) provides an inert atmosphere in lamps
....................................................................................................................... [1]
34) May 2018 [43] Q (3_a, b, c)
3 Cobalt is a transition element. Potassium is in Group I of the Periodic Table.
(a) State one physical property that is similar for cobalt and potassium.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) State one physical property that is different for cobalt and potassium.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how the physical property given in (b)(i) is different for cobalt
compared to potassium.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) When a small piece of potassium is added to cold water, the potassium
floats and disappears as it reacts.
Give two other observations that would be made when a small piece of
potassium is added to cold water.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]

261 11 – Metals and Reactivity Series Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)
1) May 2010 [31] Q (3_a)

3 A diagram of the apparatus which could be used to investigate the rate of
reaction between magnesium and an excess of an acid is drawn below.
(a) The magnesium kept rising to the surface. In one experiment, this was
prevented by twisting the magnesium around a piece of copper. In a second
experiment, the magnesium was held down by a plastic net fastened to the
beaker.
(i) Suggest a reason why magnesium, which is denser than water, floated to
the surface.
............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Iron, zinc and copper have similar densities. Why was copper a better
choice than iron or zinc to weigh down the magnesium?
............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[1]
2) May 2010 [32] Q (3_b)
3 (b) Iron and steel in the presence of water and oxygen form rust.
The reactions involved are
reaction 1
→ Fe2+ + 2e−
Fe 
The electrons move through the iron on to the surface where a colourless gas
forms.
reaction 2
Fe2+ + 2OH− 
→ Fe(OH)2
from water
reaction 3
.........Fe(OH)2 + O2 + ........H2O 
→ .......Fe(OH)3
The water evaporates to leave rust.
(i) What type of reaction is reaction 1?
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Deduce the name of the colourless gas mentioned in reaction 1.
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) What is the name of the iron compound formed in reaction 2?
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv) Balance the equation for reaction 3.
.........Fe(OH)2 + O2 + ........H2O 
→ .......Fe(OH)3
[1]
(v) Explain why the change Fe(OH)2 to Fe(OH)3 is oxidation.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) Explain why iron in electrical contact with a piece of zinc does not rust.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
3) Nov 2010 [31] Q (2_a, b)
2 About 4000 years ago the Bronze Age started in Britain. Bronze is an alloy
of copper and tin.
(a) (i) Suggest a reason why a bronze axe was better than a copper axe.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Brass is another copper alloy. Name the other metal in brass.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The diagram below shows the arrangement of particles in a pure metal.
(i) What is the name given to a regular arrangement of particles in a

crystalline solid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw a diagram which shows the arrangement of particles in an alloy.
[2]
(iii) Explain the term malleable.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Why are metals malleable?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
4) Nov 2010 [32] Q (2)
2 An ore of the important metal zinc is zinc blende, ZnS. This is changed into
zinc oxide which is reduced to the impure metal by carbon reduction.
(a) (i) How is zinc oxide obtained from zinc sulfide?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write a balanced equation for the reduction of zinc oxide by carbon.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The major impurity in the zinc is cadmium. The boiling point of zinc is
907°C and that of cadmium is 767 °C.
Name a technique which could be used to separate these two metals.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In common with most metals, zinc is a good conductor of electricity. It is

used as an electrode in cells.
(i) Give two other uses of zinc.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the metallic bonding in zinc and then explain why it is a good
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
5) Nov 2010 [33] Q (2_b)
2 Vanadium is a transition element
(b) The major use of vanadium is to make vanadium steel alloys.
(i) Explain the phrase steel alloys.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name and use of another steel alloy.
name ..................................................................................................................
use ................................................................................................................ [2]
6) Nov 2010 [33] Q (3_a, b)

3 The reactions of a metal and the thermal stability of some of its compounds
are determined by the position of the metal in the reactivity series.
(a) To find the order of reactivity of the metals, cobalt, magnesium, silver and
tin, the following experiments were carried out.
(i) Give as far as possible the order of reactivity of these metals.

Write the least reactive first.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What additional experiment needs to be done to put all four metals in order
of reactivity?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction between tin atoms and silver(I)
ions. Indicate on the equation the change which is oxidation.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Sodium is a more reactive metal than magnesium. Sodium compounds
are more stable than magnesium compounds.
In an experiment, their hydroxides were heated. If the hydroxide did not
decompose write ‘no reaction’ otherwise complete the equation.
NaOH 
→ .................................................
Mg(OH)2 
→ ................................................. [2]
7) May 2011 [31] Q (3_a, b)
3) iron from the blast furnace is impure. It contain about 4% carbon and 0.5%
silicon. Most of this impure is used to make mild steel, an alloy of iron
containing less than 0.25% carbon.
(a) A jet of oxygen is blown through the molten iron in the presence of a base,
usually calcium oxide. Explain how the percentage of carbon is reduced and
how the silicon is removed
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) (i) why are steel alloys used in preference to iron
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) state a use of the following alloys
Mild steel …………………………………………………………………..................
Stainless steel ……………………………………………………………………..[2]
8) May 2011 [31] Q (4_a, i, ii)
4) A major ore of zinc is zinc, ZnS. A by-product of the extraction of zinc from
this ore is sulphur dioxide which is used to make sulphuric acid
(a) (i) zinc blend is heated is air. Zinc oxide and sulfur dioxide are formed.
Write the balanced equation for this reaction
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) zinc oxide is reduced to zinc by heating with carbon. Name two other
reagent which could reduce zinc oxide
....................................................................................................................... [2]
9) May 2011 [31] Q (7_a)

7 Excess hydrochloric acid was added to powdered zinc. The hydrogen
evolved was collected and its volume measured every 20 seconds.
The experiments were repeated at the same temperature using the same
number of moles of powdered magnesium and aluminium.
(a) Identify metals A, B and C by choosing from zinc, magnesium and

aluminium. Give a reason for each choice.
metal A ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
metal B ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
metal C ...............................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
10) May 2011 [32] Q (2_a, c)
2 Tin is an element in Group IV.
(a) The position of tin in the reactivity series is:
zinc
iron
tin
copper
(i) For each of the following, decide if a reaction would occur. If there is a
reaction, complete the equation, otherwise write ‘no reaction’.
Cu + Sn2+ 
→ ...........................
Fe + Sn2+ 
→ ...........................
Sn + Zn2+ 
→ ........................... [4]
(ii) Name the three products formed when tin(II) nitrate is heated.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Steel articles can be plated with tin or zinc to prevent rusting.
When the zinc layer is damaged exposing the underlying steel, it does not
rust, but when the tin layer is broken the steel rusts. Explain.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
11) May 2011 [32] Q (4)
4 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in the blast furnace.
Describe the reactions involved in this extraction. Include in your description

an equation for a redox reaction and one for an acid / base reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
12) Nov 2011 [31] Q (3_c)
(c) The uses of a metal are determined by its properties.
(i) Foods which are acidic can be supplied in aluminium containers.
Explain why the acid in the food does not react with the aluminium.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why overhead electrical power cables are made from aluminium
with a steel core.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
13) Nov 2011 [31] Q (7_a, b)
7 Some hydroxides, nitrates and carbonates decompose when heated.
(a) (i) Name a metal hydroxide which does not decompose when heated.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the equation for the thermal decomposition of copper(II) hydroxide.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest why these two hydroxides behave differently.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Metal nitrates, except those of the Group 1 metals, form three products
when heated.
Name the products formed when zinc nitrate is heated.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write the equation for the thermal decomposition of potassium nitrate.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
14) Nov 2011 [32] Q (3_a, b)
3 Antimony, Sb, is an element in Group V.
(a) The main ore of antimony is its sulfide. The extraction of antimony is
similar to that of zinc.
Describe how each of these changes in the extraction of antimony is carried
out.
(i) antimony sulfide to antimony oxide

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) antimony oxide to antimony
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Antimony oxide is a white powder which is insoluble in water.
Describe how you would find out if it is a basic, an acidic or an amphoteric
oxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
15) Nov 2011 [33] Q (4_a, b, c)
4 (a) Steel rusting is an example of an oxidation reaction.
(i) Define the term steel.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Define oxidation in terms of electron transfer.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A method of preventing steel rusting is sacrificial protection.
Give an explanation, in terms of electron transfer, why the steel does not rust.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Another method of preventing steel rusting is cathodic protection.
(i) Write an equation for the formation of the gas given off at the steel cathode
during cathodic protection.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give one difference between the two methods.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
16) May 2012 [31] Q (5)
5 Reactive metals tend to have unreactive compounds. The following is part
of the reactivity series.
Sodium Most reactive
Calcium
Zinc
Copper
Silver Least rective
(a) Sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate do not decompose when heated.
The corresponding calcium compounds do decompose when heated.
Complete the following equations.
………………… ……………………..
calcium
carbonate 
→ +
………………… …………………….
Ca(OH)2 
→ …………….. + ……………………
(b) All nitrates decompose when heated.
(i) The equation for the thermal decomposition of silver(l) nitrate is given
below.
2AgNO3 
→ 2AgO + 2NO2 + O2
What are the products formed when copper (II) nitrate is heated?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the equation for the action of heat on sodium nitrate
2NaNO3 
→ .............. + ............. [2]
(c) Which of the metals in the list on page 5 have oxides which are not
reduced by carbon?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Choose from the list on page 5, metals whose ions would react with zinc.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
17) Nov 2012 [32] Q (4)

4 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in the blast furnace.
(a) The temperature inside the blast furnace can rise to 2000 °C.
Write an equation for the exothermic reaction which causes this high
temperature.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Carbon monoxide is formed in the blast furnace. This reduces the ore
hematite, Fe2O3, to iron.
(i) Explain how carbon monoxide is formed in the blast furnace.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write an equation for the reduction of hematite by carbon monoxide.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Explain why it is necessary to add limestone, calcium carbonate, to the
blast furnace.
Include an equation in your explanation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Most of the iron from the blast furnace is converted into mild steel. A
method of preventing the steel from rusting is coating it with zinc.
(i) What is the name of this method of rust prevention?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, using the idea of electron transfer, why zinc-coated steel does not
rust even when the coating is scratched and the steel is in contact with
oxygen and water.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
18) Nov 2012 [33] Q (4)
4 Zinc alloys have been used for over 2500 years.
(a) (i) Explain the phrase zinc alloy.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Making alloys is still a major use of zinc. State one other large scale use of
zinc.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe the bonding in a typical metal, such as zinc, and then explain
why it is malleable. You may use a diagram to illustrate your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) Suggest why the introduction of a different atom into the structure makes
the alloy less malleable than the pure metal.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Zinc metal is made by the reduction of zinc oxide. The major ore of zinc is
zinc blende, ZnS. Zinc blende contains silver and lead compounds as well as
zinc sulfide.
Zinc blende is converted into impure zinc oxide by heating it in air.
2 ZnS + 3 O2 
→ 2 ZnO + 2 SO2
(i) Describe how zinc oxide is reduced to zinc.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Some of the zinc oxide is dissolved in sulfuric acid to make aqueous zinc
sulfate.
Write a balanced symbol equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
19) May 2013 [31] Q (5)
5 The reactivity series shows the metals in order of reactivity.
(a) The reactivity series can be established using displacement reactions. A
piece of zinc is added to aqueous lead nitrate. The zinc becomes coated with
a black deposit of lead.
Zn + Pb2+ 
→ Zn2+ + Pb
Zinc is more reactive than lead.
The reactivity series can be written as a list of ionic equations.
...... → ...... + ...... most reactive metal: the best reductant (reducing agent)
Zn → Zn2+ + 2e–
Fe → Fe2+ + 2e–
Pb → Pb2+ + 2e–
Cu → Cu2+ + 2e–
Ag → Ag+ + e–
(i) In the space at the top of the list, write an ionic equation for a metal which
is more reactive than zinc. [1]
(ii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction between aqueous silver(I) nitrate
and zinc.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A reactivity series can also be established by measuring the voltage of
simple cells. The diagram shows a simple cell.
Results from cells using the metals tin, cadmium, zinc and copper are given in
the table below.
Write the four metals in order of increasing reactivity and explain how you
used the data in the table to determine this order.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
20) May 2013 [33] Q (3)
3 Iron from the blast furnace is impure. It contains 5% of impurities, mainly
carbon, sulfur, silicon and phosphorus. Almost all of this impure iron is
converted into the alloy, mild steel.
(a) (i) State a use of mild steel.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name and give a use of another iron-containing alloy.
name ..................................................................................................................
use ................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) The oxides of carbon and sulfur are gases. The oxides of silicon and
phosphorus are not.
Explain how these impurities are removed from the impure iron when it is
converted into mild steel.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
21) May 2013 [33] Q (5_a)

5 All metal nitrates decompose when heated. A few form a nitrite and oxygen.
Most form the metal oxide, oxygen and a brown gas called nitrogen dioxide.
(a) (i) Name a metal whose nitrate decomposes to form the metal nitrite and
oxygen.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the equation for the action of heat on lead(II) nitrate.
......Pb(NO3 )2 
→ ......... + ......NO2 + O2
[2]
(iii) Suggest why the nitrate of the metal, named in (a)(i), decomposes less
readily than lead(II) nitrate.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
22) Nov 2013 [31] Q (2_b)
(b) The following metals are in order of reactivity.
potassium
zinc
copper
For those metals which react with water or steam, name the products of the
reaction, otherwise write ‘no reaction’.
potassium ...........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
zinc .....................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
copper ................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
23) Nov 2013 [32] Q (4_a)
4 For centuries, iron has been extracted from its ore in the blast furnace. The
world production of pig iron is measured in hundreds of million tonnes
annually.
(a) The following raw materials are supplied to a modern blast furnace.
iron ore which is hematite, Fe2O3
limestone which is calcium carbonate
carbon in the form of coke
air
Describe the essential reactions in the blast furnace. Each of the four raw
materials must be mentioned at least once. Give the equation for the
reduction of hematite.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [6]
24) Nov 2013 [32] Q (6)
6 The following reactivity series shows both familiar and unfamiliar elements
in order of decreasing reactivity. Each element is represented by a redox
equation.
Two of the uses of the series are to predict the thermal stability of compounds
of the metals and to explain their redox reactions.
(a) Most metal hydroxides decompose when heated.
(i) Complete the equation for the thermal decomposition of copper(II)
hydroxide.
Cu(OH)2 
→ ............... + ............... [1]
(ii) Choose a metal from the above series whose hydroxide does not
decompose when heated.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Define in terms of electron transfer the term oxidation.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the positive ions in the above equations are oxidising agents.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) Which metals in the series above do not react with dilute acids to form
hydrogen?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe an experiment which would confirm the prediction made in (c)(i).
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) (i) Which metal in the series above can form a negative ion which gives a
pink / purple solution in water?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what you would observe when zinc, a reducing agent, is added
to this pink / purple solution.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
25) Nov 2013 [33] Q (3_a, b, d)
3 The main uses of zinc are preventing steel from rusting and making alloys.
(a) The main ore of zinc is zinc blende. Zinc blende consists mainly of zinc
sulfide, ZnS.
There are two major methods of extracting zinc from its ore. They are the
direct reduction of zinc oxide to zinc and by electrolysis. In both methods, zinc
oxide is made from the zinc sulfide in the ore.
(i) How is zinc oxide made from zinc sulfide?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write an equation for the reaction used to reduce zinc oxide to zinc.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In the electrolytic method, zinc oxide reacts with sulfuric acid to form
impure aqueous zinc sulfate. This solution contains Ni2+, Co2+ and Cu2+ ions
as impurities.
(i) Write the equation for the reaction between zinc oxide and sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Nickel, cobalt and copper are all less reactive than zinc. Explain why the
addition of zinc powder removes these ions from the solution.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) (i) Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc. Suggest two reasons why brass is
often used in preference to copper.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Sacrificial protection is a method of rust prevention. Explain in terms of

electron transfer why steel, which is in electrical contact with zinc, does not
rust.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
26) May 2014 [31] Q (5)
5 Zinc is obtained from the ore, zinc blende, ZnS.
(a) Describe the extraction of zinc from its ore, zinc blende. Include at least
one balanced equation in your description.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) State two major uses of zinc.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
27) May 2014 [31] Q (7_a, i, b, iii, iv)
7 One way of establishing a reactivity series is by displacement reactions.
(a) A series of experiments was carried out using the metals lead,
magnesium, zinc and silver.
Each metal was added in turn to aqueous solutions of the metal nitrates.
The order of reactivity was found to be:
magnesium most reactive
zinc
lead
silver least reactive
(i) Complete the table.

= reacts
= does not react
(b) (iii) The following table gives the polarity of cells using the metals zinc,
lead, copper and manganese.
What information about the order of reactivity of these four metals can be
deduced from the table?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) What additional information is needed to establish the order of reactivity of
these four metals using cells?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
28) May 2014 [33] Q (4_a, b, iii)
4 Iron from a blast furnace contains about 5% of the impurities – carbon,
silicon, phosphorus and sulfur.
Most of this impure iron is used to make steels, such as mild steel, and a very
small percentage is used to make pure iron.
(a) Calcium oxide and oxygen are used to remove the impurities from the iron
produced in the blast furnace.
(i) State how these chemicals are manufactured.
calcium oxide .....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
oxygen ...............................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Describe how these two chemicals remove the four impurities. Include at
least one equation in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) (iii) Mild steel is an alloy of iron and carbon.
Suggest why mild steel is harder than pure iron.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
29) Nov 2014 [31] Q (3_b)
(b) One source of sulfur dioxide is burning sulfur in air.
Describe how sulfur dioxide can be made from the ore zinc sulfide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
30) Nov 2014 [31] Q (4)
4 Iron is extracted from the ore hematite in the Blast Furnace.
(a) The coke reacts with the oxygen in the air to form carbon dioxide.
C + O2 
→ CO2
(i) Explain why carbon monoxide is formed higher in the Blast Furnace.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write an equation for the reduction of hematite, Fe2O3, by carbon
monoxide.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Limestone decomposes to form two products, one of which is calcium
oxide.
Name the other product.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calcium oxide reacts with silicon(IV) oxide, an acidic impurity in the iron
ore, to form slag.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why the molten iron and the molten slag form two layers and why
molten iron is the lower layer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Suggest why the molten iron does not react with the air.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Iron and steel rust. Iron is oxidised to hydrated iron(III) oxide, Fe2O3.2H2O,
which is rust.
(i) Name the two substances which cause iron to rust.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why an aluminium article coated with aluminium oxide is protected
from further corrosion but a steel article coated with rust continues to corrode.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) There are two electrochemical methods of rust prevention.
(i) The first method is sacrificial protection.
Explain why the steel article does not rust.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
The second method is to make the steel article the cathode in a circuit for
electrolysis.
(ii) Mark on the diagram the direction of the electron flow. [1]
(iii) The steel girder does not rust because it is the cathode. Reduction takes
place at the cathode. Give the equation for the reduction of hydrogen ions.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
31) Nov 2014 [32] Q (2_d)
(d) A major use of aluminium is the manufacture of pots and pans. One
reason for this is its resistance to corrosion.
(i) Explain why aluminium, a reactive metal, is resistant to corrosion.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two other reasons why aluminium is suitable for making pots and
pans.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
32) Nov 2014 [32] Q (4_a, b, i)
4 Zinc is an important metal. Its uses include making alloys and the
construction of dry cells (batteries).
(a) Name an alloy which contains zinc. What is the other metal in this alloy?
name of alloy ......................................................................................................
other metal in alloy .............................................................................................
[2]
(b) The main ore of zinc is zinc blende, ZnS.

(i) The ore is heated in the presence of air to form zinc oxide and sulfur
dioxide.
Write the equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
33) Nov 2014 [32] Q (6_c)
(c) When a mixture of sulfur and potassium nitrate is burned and the products
are dissolved in water, sulfuric acid is formed.
(i) The sulfuric acid formed by this method is not pure. It contains another
acid.
Deduce the identity of this acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The heat causes some of the potassium nitrate to decompose.
Write the equation for the action of heat on potassium nitrate.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
34) Nov 2014 [33] Q (6_b, ii, c)
(ii) Complete the equation for the decomposition of strontium carbonate.
SrCO3 
→ ............ + ............
(c) Metal nitrates decompose when heated.
(i) Rubidium nitrate decomposes as follows:
2 RbNO3 
→ 2 RbNO2 + O2
What is the name of the compound RbNO2?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The nitrates of most other metals decompose in a different way.
Complete the equation for the decomposition of strontium nitrate.
....... Sr(NO3 )2 
→ ............ + 4 NO2 + ............
[2]
35) May 2015 [31] Q (2)

2 Iron from the Blast Furnace is impure. It contains about 5% of impurities,
mainly carbon, sulfur, silicon and phosphorus, which have to be removed
when this iron is converted into steel.
(a) Explain how the addition of oxygen and calcium oxide removes these
impurities. Include an equation for a reaction of oxygen and a word equation
for a reaction of calcium oxide in this process.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Mild steel is the most common form of steel. Mild steel contains a
maximum of 0.3% of carbon.
High carbon steel contains 2% of carbon. It is less malleable and much harder
than mild steel.
(i) Give a use of mild steel.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a use of high carbon steel.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why metals are malleable.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) Suggest an explanation why high carbon steel is less malleable and
harder than mild steel.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
36) May 2015 [32] Q (6_b, i, iii, c, i)

(b) All nitrates decompose when heated. The extent to which a nitrate
decomposes is determined by the metal in the salt.
(i) Sodium nitrate decomposes to form sodium nitrite, NaNO2.
Write the equation for decomposition of sodium nitrate.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Copper(II) nitrate decomposes to form copper(II) oxide, nitrogen dioxide
and oxygen.
What is the relationship between the extent of decomposition and the
reactivity of the metal in the nitrate?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The equation for the decomposition of copper(II) nitrate is given below.
2 Cu(NO3 )2 
→ 2 CuO + 4 NO2 + O2
(i) Predict what you would observe when copper(II) nitrate is heated.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
37) May 2015 [33] Q (5_a, b)
5 The law of constant composition states that all pure samples of a compound
contain the same elements in the same proportion by weight.
A typical experiment to test this law is to prepare the same compound by
different methods and then show that the samples have the same
composition.
Methods of making copper(II) oxide include:
• heating copper carbonate,
• heating copper hydroxide,
• heating copper nitrate,
• heating copper foil in air.
(a) Complete the following equations.
(i) CuCO3 
→ ............. + ............. [1]
(ii) Cu(OH)2 
→ ............. + ............. [1]
(iii) 2Cu(NO3)2 
→ ............. + 4NO2 + ............. [1]
(b) Copper oxide can be reduced to copper by heating in hydrogen.

(i) What colour change would you observe during the reduction?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the copper must be allowed to cool in hydrogen before it is
exposed to air.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name another gas which can reduce copper(II) oxide to copper.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Name a solid which can reduce copper(II) oxide to copper.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
38) Nov 2015 [32] Q (3_a, b, d, e)
3 Two of the main uses of zinc are for galvanising and for making alloys.
One of the main ores of zinc is zinc blende, ZnS. There are two stages in the
extraction of zinc from this ore.
(a) Stage 1 Zinc oxide is made from zinc blende.
Describe how this is done and write a word equation for the reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Stage 2 Zinc oxide is reduced to zinc.
Write a word equation for the reduction of zinc oxide by coke.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Brass is an alloy which contains zinc.
(i) Name the other metal in brass.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two reasons why an alloy such as brass is preferred to either of
its constituent metals.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) In an experiment to investigate the rate of rusting of steel, three pieces of
steel were used. One piece of steel was completely coated with copper, one
piece completely coated with zinc and the third piece was left uncoated. All
three pieces were left exposed to the atmosphere.
(i) Explain why the uncoated piece started to rust.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The coating on both of the other two pieces was scratched, exposing the
steel.
The piece of steel coated with zinc still did not rust but the copper-coated
piece of steel rusted very rapidly.
Explain these observations in terms of the formation of ions and the transfer
of electrons.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
39) Nov 2015 [32] Q (5)
5 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in a blast furnace.
Substances added to the furnace are:
• iron ore, hematite, containing impurities such as silica, SiO2
• air
• coke, C
• limestone, CaCO3
Substances formed in the blast furnace are:
• molten iron
• molten slag
• waste gases such as carbon dioxide
(a) State the two functions of the coke used in the blast furnace.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Write an equation for the conversion of hematite, Fe2O3, to iron.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Explain how the silica impurity is removed and separated from the molten
iron.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) The molten iron from the furnace is impure.
It contains impurities which include the element carbon.
Explain how the carbon is removed. Include an equation in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
40) Nov 2015 [33] Q (6)
6 A reactivity series of metals is given below.
(a) Which two metals will react most vigorously with cold water?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which two metals will not react with dilute hydrochloric acid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Deduce the formula of iron(III) sulfate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) What is the formula of a magnesium ion?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Describe a test-tube experiment which will show that manganese is more
reactive than copper.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
41) May 2016 [42] Q (3_d)
(d) Alloys of gallium and other elements are often more useful than the
metallic element itself.
Suggest two reasons why alloys of gallium are more useful than the metallic
element.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
42) May 2016 [42] Q (6_a, b, c)
6 Zinc is extracted from an ore called zinc blende, which consists mainly of
zinc sulfide, ZnS.
(a) (i) The zinc sulfide in the ore is first converted into zinc oxide.
Describe how zinc oxide is made from zinc sulfide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction in (a)(i).
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Zinc oxide is converted into zinc. Zinc oxide and coke are fed into a
furnace. Hot air is blown into the bottom of the furnace.
Zinc has a melting point of 420 °C and a boiling point of 907 °C. The
temperature inside the furnace is over 1000 °C.
(i) Explain how zinc oxide is converted into zinc. Your answer should include
details of how the heat is produced and equations for all the reactions you
describe.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why the zinc produced inside the furnace is a gas.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the physical change for conversion of gaseous zinc into
molten zinc.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Rusting of steel can be prevented by coating the steel with a layer of zinc.
Explain, in terms of electron transfer, why steel does not rust even if the layer
of zinc is scratched so that the steel is exposed to air and water.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
43) May 2016 [43] Q (1)
1 The diagram shows a blast furnace.
(a) The following equations represent reactions which take place in the blast
furnace.
(i) Which reaction is used to increase the temperature inside the blast
furnace? ........... [1]
(ii) Which reaction is an example of thermal decomposition? ........... [1]
(iii) In which reaction is carbon both oxidised and reduced? ........... [1]
(iv) Which equation shows the removal of an impurity from the iron? ...........[1]
(v) Which equation shows the reaction of an acidic substance with a basic
substance?........... [1]
(b) Use the diagram of the blast furnace to help you answer these questions.
(i) What enters the blast furnace at X?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What leaves the blast furnace at Y?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name two waste gases that leave the blast furnace.
1. ........................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The graph shows how the malleability of iron changes as the percentage
of carbon in the iron changes.
(i) Describe how the malleability of iron changes as the percentage of carbon
changes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Iron obtained from the blast furnace contains high levels of carbon.
Explain how the amount of carbon in the iron can be decreased.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
44) Nov 2016 [42] Q (6_c)

(c) Give two uses of aluminium and give a reason why aluminium is suitable
for each use.
use 1 ..................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
use 2 ..................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
[4]
45) May 2017 [41] Q (4_a, b)
4 Zinc is a very important metal.
(a) Zinc is extracted from its ore, zinc blende. Zinc blende contains zinc
sulfide, ZnS.
Zinc sulfide is converted to zinc oxide in an industrial process.
(i) Describe how zinc sulfide is converted to zinc oxide in this industrial
process.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Zinc oxide is then reduced in a furnace.
(i) Name the substance added to the furnace to reduce the zinc oxide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how the pure zinc is removed from the furnace and collected.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
46) May 2017 [43] Q (5_b, c)

The simple cell was used with different metals as electrodes. The voltages
were recorded in the table.
● If the voltage measured is positive then metal 2 is more reactive than metal 1.
● If the voltage measured is negative then metal 1 is more reactive than metal 2.
● The more reactive metal is oxidised.

● The bigger the difference in reactivity of the metals, the larger the reading
on the voltmeter.
(b) Use the data in the table to answer the following questions.
(i) Which of the metals in the table is the most reactive?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State which two different metals have the same reactivity.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Predict the voltage produced by a simple cell with beryllium as metal 1
and silver as metal 2.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe how the simple cell in the diagram can be used to show that
magnesium is more reactive than beryllium. Explain your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
47) May 2017 [43] Q (6_a)
6 Barium carbonate, BaCO3, is an insoluble solid.
(a) When barium carbonate is heated strongly, it undergoes thermal
decomposition. One of the products is barium oxide.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of barium
carbonate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the pH of the solution formed when barium oxide is added to
water.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Barium nitrate decomposes on heating in the same way as magnesium
nitrate decomposes.
Name the two gaseous products formed when barium nitrate is heated.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
48) Nov 2017 [41] Q (3_b)
(b) The metal iron and the alloy steel are commonly used materials. A
problem with them is that they rust.
(i) How does painting iron and steel prevent rusting?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Magnesium blocks can be attached to the bottom of steel boats.
Explain how the magnesium blocks prevent the whole of the bottom of the
boat from rusting.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Replacing the magnesium blocks with copper blocks does not prevent
rusting.
Explain why the copper blocks do not prevent rusting.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
49) Nov 2017 [41] Q (5_a, b, ii)
5 (a) Solid copper(II) carbonate undergoes thermal decomposition. One of the
products of the thermal decomposition is copper(II) oxide.
(i) State the colour change of the solid seen during the reaction.
start colour .........................................................................................................
end colour ..........................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of copper(II)
carbonate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (ii) Copper(II) nitrate undergoes thermal decomposition.
Balance the chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of copper(II)
nitrate.
......Cu(NO3)2 
→ ......CuO + ......NO2 + ......O2
[1]
50) Nov 2017 [43] Q (3_a, b)
3 Iron is extracted from its ore using coke in a blast furnace.
(a) Name the ore of iron which is mainly iron(III) oxide.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe the reactions occurring in the blast furnace.

In your answer, include
● two reasons for using coke in the blast furnace,
● a chemical equation for the reduction of iron(III) oxide,
● an explanation for using limestone in the blast furnace.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [6]
51) Nov 2017 [43] Q (5_a)
5 (a) (i) Name the products formed when sodium nitrate is heated.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) When copper(II) nitrate, Cu(NO3)2, undergoes thermal decomposition,
three products are formed. One of the products is nitrogen dioxide, NO2.
Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of copper(II) nitrate.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
52) May 2018 [41] Q (3)
3 This question is about iron.
(a) Three of the raw materials added to a blast furnace used to extract iron
from hematite are coke, hematite and limestone.
Name one other raw material added to the blast furnace.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A series of reactions occurs in a blast furnace during the extraction of iron
from hematite.
Describe these reactions.
Include:
● one chemical equation for the reduction of hematite
● one chemical equation for the formation of slag.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
(c) The iron extracted from hematite using a blast furnace is impure.
Identify the main impurity in this iron and explain how it is removed in the
steel‑making process.
main impurity ......................................................................................................
how it is removed ...............................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
53) May 2018 [42] Q (6_b)
(b) Nitrates decompose when heated.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the decomposition of sodium nitrate when it
is heated.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The unbalanced chemical equation for the decomposition of hydrated
copper(II) nitrate crystals is shown.
Balance the chemical equation for this reaction.
2Cu(NO3)2.3H2O(s) 
→ .....CuO(s) + ......NO2(g) + O2(g) + ......H2O(g)
[2]
(iii) When the hydrated copper(II) nitrate crystals are heated, steam is
produced. When the steam condenses on a cool surface, it turns into a
colourless liquid.
Anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride is used to show that the colourless liquid
contains water.
How does the colour of the anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride change?
from ................................................. to ..............................................................
[2]
(iv) How would the student test to determine if the water produced in (b)(iii) is
pure?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
54) May 2018 [43] Q (2_c)

(c) When a piece of zinc metal is added to copper(II) sulfate solution there is
an immediate reaction.
Zn + CuSO4 
→ ZnSO4 + Cu
When a piece of aluminium metal is added to copper(II) sulfate solution the
initial reaction is very slow.
(i) Explain why zinc metal reacts with copper(II) sulfate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the initial reaction between aluminium metal and copper(II)
sulfate is very slow.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
55) May 2018 [43] Q (6_b)
6 Calcium chlorate(V), Ca(ClO3)2, is made by reacting calcium hydroxide with
chlorine gas.
(b) Calcium chlorate(V) undergoes thermal decomposition.
The only products are calcium chloride and a colourless gas.
(i) What must be done to calcium chlorate(V) to make it thermally
decompose?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of calcium
chlorate(V).
....................................................................................................................... [2]
300 12 – Air and Water Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 Q (2_iv)

(iv) The oxides of nitrogen are atmospheric pollutants. Describe how they are
formed.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
2) Nov 2011 [32] Q (7_d)
(d) Some of the pollutants emitted by vehicle exhausts are carbon monoxide,
oxides of nitrogen and unburnt hydrocarbons. Explain how the emission of
these gases is reduced by a catalytic converter.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [3]
3) May 2012 [31] Q (1_b, c)
1) The diagram below shows part of the Water Cycle.
(b) The rain drains into rivers and then into reservoirs. Describe how water is
treated before it enters the water supply.
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) Explain how acid rain is formed.
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Fish live in water which is neutral (neither acidic nor alkaline). Acid rain
decreases the pH of water in lakes and rivers. Both of the bases, calcium
oxide and calcium carbonate, can neutralise this acid and increase the pH.
Explain why calcium carbonate is a better choice.
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
....................................................................................................................... [2]

4) Nov 2012 [31] Q (3_c)

(c) Catalytic converters reduce the pollution from motor vehicles.
(i) Describe how carbon monoxide and the oxides of nitrogen are formed in
car engines.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Describe the reaction(s) inside the catalytic converter which change these
pollutants into less harmful gases. Include at least one equation in your
description.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
5) May 2013 [32] Q (1)
1 Air is a mixture of gases. The main constituents are the elements oxygen
and nitrogen.
(a) (i) Name another element in air.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give the formula of a compound in unpolluted air.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Common pollutants present in air are the oxides of nitrogen and sulfur
dioxide.
(i) How are the oxides of nitrogen formed?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) How is sulfur dioxide formed?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) These oxides are largely responsible for acid rain.

State two harmful effects of acid rain.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The percentage of oxygen in air can be determined by the following
experiment.
The gas syringe contains 50 cm3 of air. The large pile of copper is heated and
the air is passed from one gas syringe to the other over the hot copper. The
large pile of copper turns black. The gas is allowed to cool and its volume
measured.
The small pile of copper is heated and the remaining gas passed over the hot
copper.
The copper does not turn black. The final volume of gas left in the apparatus
is less than 50 cm3.
(i) Explain why the copper in the large pile turns black.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Why must the gas be allowed to cool before its volume is measured?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the copper in the small pile did not turn black.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) What is the approximate volume of the gas left in the apparatus?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
6) May 2014 [31] Q (2_a)
2 (a) Water is needed for industry and in the home.
(i) Rain water is collected in reservoirs. How is it treated before entering the
water supply?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State two industrial uses of water.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State two uses of water in the home.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
7) May 2014 [32] Q (3_b, i)
(b) Crops do not grow well if the soil is too acidic.
(i) One cause of acidity in soil is acid rain. Explain how acid rain is formed.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
8) Nov 2014 [31] Q (5)
5 Three common pollutants in the air are carbon monoxide, the oxides of
nitrogen, NO and NO2, and unburnt hydrocarbons. They are all emitted by
motor vehicles.
(a) Describe how the oxides of nitrogen are formed.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how a catalytic converter reduces the emission of these three
pollutants.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) Other atmospheric pollutants are lead compounds from leaded petrol.
Explain why lead compounds are harmful.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

9) May 2015 [31] Q (1)

1 (a) Coal is a solid fossil fuel.
Name two other fossil fuels.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two of the elements present in a sample of coal are carbon and sulfur.
A sample of coal was heated in the absence of air and the products included
water, ammonia and hydrocarbons.
Name three other elements present in this sample of coal.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Sulfur, present in coal, is one major cause of acid rain. Sulfur burns to
form sulfur dioxide which reacts with rain water to form sulfuric acid.
(i) Describe how the high temperatures in vehicle engines are another cause
of acid rain.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Give two harmful effects of acid rain.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) In 2010, a large coal-burning power station in the UK was converted to
burn both coal and wood.
Explain why the combustion of wood rather than coal can reduce the effect of
the emissions from this power station on the level of carbon dioxide in the
atmosphere.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
10) May 2015 [33] Q (4_a, b, i, ii)
4 (a) (i) Coal is a solid fossil fuel.
Name another fossil fuel.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain what is meant by the term fossil fuel.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The burning of fossil fuels is largely responsible for the formation of acid
rain. Two of the acids in acid rain are sulfuric acid and nitric acid.
(i) Explain how the combustion of coal can form sulfuric acid.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) High temperatures generated by the combustion of fossil fuels can lead to
the formation of nitric acid. Explain.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
11) Nov 2015 [32] Q (2)
2 (a) Polluted air contains two oxides of carbon and two oxides of nitrogen. A
major source of these pollutants is motor vehicles.
(i) Describe how carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide are formed in motor
vehicle engines.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State one adverse effect of each of these gases.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Nitrogen monoxide, NO, is released by motor vehicle exhausts.
Explain how nitrogen monoxide is formed in motor vehicle engines.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) When nitrogen monoxide is released into the atmosphere, nitrogen
dioxide, NO2, is formed.
Suggest an explanation why this happens.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Predict the possible adverse effect on the environment when this non-
metal oxide, NO2, reacts with water and oxygen.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) How are the amounts of carbon monoxide and nitrogen monoxide emitted
by modern motor vehicles reduced? Include an equation in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
12) May 2016 [41] Q (2_g)
(g) Chlorine and compounds of chlorine are important in water treatment and
in laboratory testing for water.
(i) Chlorine is added to water to make the water safe to drink.
Explain why adding chlorine makes water safe to drink.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
13) May 2016 [43] Q (3)
3 Clean dry air contains mainly nitrogen and oxygen.
(a) Name two other gases that are in clean dry air.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Air often contains pollutants.
Identify three common gaseous pollutants in air and state how each of these
pollutants are produced.
pollutant gas 1 ....................................................................................................
how it is produced ..............................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
pollutant gas 2 ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
pollutant gas 3 ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[6]

14) Nov 2016 [42] Q (3_a, b)

3 Clean, dry air contains a small amount of carbon dioxide.
(a) The percentages of the other gases present in clean, dry air are shown in
the table.
Complete the table by inserting the names of these gases.
name of gas percentage present
78
21
[3]
(b) Oxides of nitrogen are atmospheric pollutants which can cause acid rain.
Describe the formation of oxides of nitrogen and suggest how they can cause
acid rain.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
15) May 2017 [41] Q (2_a, i)
(a) Answer the following questions using only oxides from the list. Each oxide
Give the formula of an oxide
(i) which is the main cause of acid rain, ........................................................ [1]
16) May 2017 [42] Q (2_d)
(d) Samples of air taken from industrial areas are found to contain small
amounts of carbon monoxide.
(i) Explain how this carbon monoxide is formed.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State why carbon monoxide should not be inhaled.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

17) May 2017 [43] Q (4_c)

(c) Car engines produce carbon monoxide and oxides of nitrogen.
(i) Name an environmental problem that is caused by the release of oxides of
nitrogen into the air.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how carbon monoxide and oxides of nitrogen are formed in car
engines. carbon monoxide .................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
oxides of nitrogen ...............................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) State one adverse effect of carbon monoxide on human health.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Describe and explain how catalytic converters remove oxides of nitrogen
from car engine exhaust fumes. You are advised to include a chemical
equation in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
18) May 2018 [43] Q (1_a)
1 The following are the symbols and formulae of some elements and
compounds.
Ar Ca(OH)2 Cl2 CO2 Cu Fe SO2 V2O5
Answer the following questions using only the elements or compounds in the
list.
Each element or compound may be used once, more than once or not at all.
State which element or compound is used:
(a) to kill bacteria in drinking water ............................................................... [1]

310 13 – Non–metals Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (1_iv)

1 Choose an element which fits each of the following descriptions.
(iv) It has a basic oxide of the type MO which is used to treat acidic soils.
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
2) May 2010 [31] Q (8_b, i)
(b) In some areas when water is boiled, the inside of kettles becomes coated
with a layer of calcium carbonate. This can be removed by adding methanoic
acid.
(i) Complete the equation.
....... HCOOH + CaCO3 
→ Ca(HCOO)2 +.......... + ...........
[2]
3) Nov 2010 [31] Q (7)
7 The diagram shows part of the carbon cycle. This includes some of the
processes which determine the percentage of carbon dioxide in the
atmosphere.
(i) Carbon dioxide is one greenhouse gas. Name another one.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain the term respiration and how this process increases the
percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why the combustion of waste crop material should not alter the
percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) In 1960 the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere was 0.032%
and in 2008 it was 0.038%. Suggest an explanation for this increase.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

4) Nov 2010 [32] Q (7_a, b)

7 The major use of sulfur dioxide is to manufacture sulfuric acid.
(a) (i) Another use of sulfur dioxide is as the food additive E220.
How does it preserve food?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why is sulfur dioxide used in the manufacture of wood pulp?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) How is sulfur dioxide manufactured?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the following description of the manufacture of sulfuric acid.
Sulfur dioxide reacts with .................................. to form sulfur trioxide.
The above reaction is catalysed by ................................................. .
The optimum temperature for this reaction is .............................. °C.
Sulfur trioxide needs to react with ............................... to form sulfuric acid. [4]
5) Nov 2011 [32] Q (2)

2 Sulfur is needed for the production of sulfuric acid. Two of the major sources
of sulfur are
● underground deposits of the element sulfur,
● sulfur compounds from natural gas and petroleum.
(a) Explain why sulfur and its compounds are removed from these fuels
before they are burned.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Sulfur dioxide is made by spraying molten sulfur into air. The sulfur ignites
and sulfur dioxide is formed.
(i) Suggest why molten sulfur is used in the form of a fine spray.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why traces of sulfur dioxide act as a preservative in fruit juices.
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) State another use of sulfur dioxide.
.................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Describe how sulfur dioxide is changed into sulfur trioxide. Give the
reaction conditions and an equation.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) Complete the following equations for the formation of sulfuric acid from
sulfur trioxide.
SO3 + ............... 
→ H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + ............ 
→ ..........H2SO 4 [2]
6) Nov 2011 [33] Q (3)

3 Fertilisers are used to promote plant growth.
Two fertilisers are ammonium phosphate, (NH4)3PO4, and calcium dihydrogen
phosphate, Ca(H2PO4)2.
(a) Describe a test to distinguish between these two fertilisers.
test ................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
result .............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Many fertilisers are manufactured from ammonia. Describe how ammonia
is made in the Haber process. Give the essential conditions and an equation
for the process.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State the essential plant nutrient not supplied by ammonium phosphate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The soluble compound, calcium dihydrogen phosphate is made by heating
the insoluble mineral rock phosphate, Ca3(PO4)2, with sulfuric acid.
(i) Why would rock phosphate not be effective as a fertiliser?
.................................................................................................................................. [1]

7) Nov 2012 [32] Q (5)

5 The food additive E220 is sulfur dioxide. It is a preservative for a variety of
foods and drinks.
(a) State two other uses of sulfur dioxide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) How is sulfur dioxide manufactured?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Sulfur dioxide is a reductant (reducing agent). Describe what you would
see when aqueous sulfur dioxide is added to acidified potassium
manganate(VII).
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
8) Nov 2012 [33] Q (7_a, b)
 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 
(a) State one major use of ammonia.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe how hydrogen is obtained for the Haber process.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) This reaction is carried out at a high pressure, 200 atmospheres.
State, with an explanation for each, two advantages of using a high pressure.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]

9) May 2013 [31] Q (6_b)

(b) Ammonia is manufactured by the Haber process. The economics of this
process require that as much ammonia as possible is made as quickly as
possible.
Explain how this can be done using the following information.
The conditions for the following reversible reaction are:
● 450 °C
● 200 atmospheres pressure
● iron catalyst
 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g)  the reaction is exothermic
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
10) May 2013 [32] Q (3_a, b)
3 The diagram shows some of the processes which determine the percentage
of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.
(a) Explain how the following two processes alter the percentage of carbon
dioxide in the atmosphere.
(i) combustion
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) respiration
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Photosynthesis reduces the percentage of carbon dioxide in the

atmosphere.
(i) Complete the word equation for photosynthesis.
carbon dioxide + water 
→ ........................ + ........................
[2]
(ii) State two essential conditions for the above reaction to occur.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
11) Nov 2013 [31] Q (3_a)
3 Ammonia is manufactured by the Haber process.
 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 
(a) Describe how the reactants are obtained.
(i) Nitrogen
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Hydrogen
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
12) Nov 2013 [32] Q (3_b)
(b) (i) Nitric acid is used to make the fertiliser ammonium nitrate, NH4NO3.
What advantage has this fertiliser over another common fertiliser, ammonium
sulfate, (NH4)2SO4?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Plants need nitrogen to make chlorophyll. Explain why chlorophyll is
essential for plant growth.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

13) Nov 2013 [32] Q (4_b i, ii)

(b) Each year, blast furnaces discharge millions of tonnes of carbon dioxide
into the atmosphere. This will increase the percentage of atmospheric carbon
dioxide.
(i) Explain why this increased percentage of carbon dioxide may cause
problems in the future.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Until the early eighteenth century, charcoal, not coke, was used in the
blast furnace.
Charcoal is made from wood but coke is made from coal. Explain why the use
of charcoal would have a smaller effect on the level of atmospheric carbon
dioxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
14) Nov 2013 [33] Q (4_a, b)
4 Sulfuric acid is a strong acid. Hexane sulfonic acid is also a strong acid. It
has similar properties to sulfuric acid.
(a) Sulfonic acids are made from alkanes and oleum, H2S2O7.
C6H14 + H2S2O7 
→ C6H13SO3H + H2SO4
(i) Describe how oleum is made from sulfur by the Contact process. Give
equations and reaction conditions.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [6]
(ii) How is concentrated sulfuric acid made from oleum?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The formula of the hexane sulfonate ion is C6H13SO3−
The formula of the barium ion is Ba2+. What is the formula of barium hexane
sulfonate?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

15) May 2014 [32] Q (3_a, b, ii)

3 Plant growth is improved by the availability of essential elements, such as
nitrogen, and by the soil having a suitable pH.
(a) Nitrogen-based fertilisers are made from ammonia. Ammonia is
manufactured by the Haber process.
(i) Describe the Haber process giving reaction conditions and a balanced
equation. (Do not discuss reaction rate and yield.)
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) Fertilisers contain nitrogen.
Name the other two elements essential for plant growth commonly found in
fertilisers.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name two bases which are used to increase the pH of acidic soils.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
16) May 2014 [33] Q (5_a, b)
 2NH3(g)
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 

The conditions in the reaction chamber are:
● a pressure of 200 atmospheres,
● a catalyst of finely divided iron,
● a temperature of 400 to 450 °C.
(a) What are the two advantages of using a high pressure? Give a reason for
both.
advantage 1 .......................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
advantage 2 .......................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[4]

(b) A higher temperature would give a faster reaction rate.

Why is a higher temperature not used?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
17) Nov 2014 [31] Q (3_a, c, d)
3 The main use of sulfur dioxide is the manufacture of sulfuric acid.
(a) State two other uses of sulfur dioxide.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The Contact process changes sulfur dioxide into sulfur trioxide.
 2 SO3(g)
2 SO2(g) + O2(g) 
the forward reaction is exothermic
temperature 400 to 450 °C
low pressure 1 to 10 atmospheres
catalyst vanadium(V) oxide
(i) What is the formula of vanadium(V) oxide?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Vanadium(V) oxide is an efficient catalyst at any temperature in the range
400 to 450 °C.
Scientists are looking for an alternative catalyst which is efficient at 300 °C.
What would be the advantage of using a lower temperature?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The process does not use a high pressure because of the extra expense.
Suggest two advantages of using a high pressure?
Explain your suggestions.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

(d) Sulfuric acid is made by dissolving sulfur trioxide in concentrated sulfuric

acid to form oleum.
Water is reacted with oleum to form more sulfuric acid.
Why is sulfur trioxide not reacted directly with water?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
18) May 2015 [32] Q (6_a)
6 The Atacama desert in Chile has deposits of the salt sodium nitrate. Very
large amounts of this salt were exported to Europe for use as a fertiliser. After
the introduction of the Haber process in 1913, this trade rapidly diminished.
(a) (i) Explain why the introduction of the Haber process reduced the demand
for sodium nitrate.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why surface deposits of sodium nitrate only occur in areas with
very low rainfall such as desert areas.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The desert has smaller surface deposits of potassium nitrate.
Suggest why potassium nitrate is a better fertiliser than the sodium salt.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
19) May 2015 [33] Q (3_a, b, d)
3 Quicklime, which is calcium oxide, is made by heating limestone in a
furnace.
CaCO3(s) 
→ CaO(s) + CO2(g)
The reaction does not come to equilibrium.

(a) Suggest why the conversion to calcium oxide is complete.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calcium hydroxide, slaked lime, is made from calcium oxide.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Limestone is used in agriculture to reduce the acidity of soil and for the
desulfurisation of flue gases in power stations.
(i) Most crops thrive in soils whose pH is close to 7. Calcium carbonate, which
is insoluble in water, and calcium oxide, which is slightly soluble in water, are
both used to reduce the acidity of soils.
Suggest two advantages of using calcium carbonate for this purpose.
1. ........................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain the chemistry of desulfurisation of flue gases.

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Give one other use of calcium carbonate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
20) Nov 2015 [31] Q (3_f, g)
3 Sulfuric acid is made by the Contact process.
(f) Name the catalyst used in the Contact process.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) Describe how concentrated sulfuric acid is made from sulfur trioxide.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
21) Nov 2015 [33] Q (2)
2 Choose from the following list of gases. A gas may be chosen once, more
than once or not at all.
sulfur dioxide hydrogen methane carbon monoxide
argon ethene butane
(a) It is used to bleach wood pulp. ................................................................ [1]

(b) When burned in oxygen, the only product is water. ................................ [1]
(d) It is used to provide an inert atmosphere for welding. ............................. [1]
(e) When reacted with oxygen, the only product is carbon dioxide. .............. [1]
(f) It is produced by the decay of vegetation in the absence of oxygen. ....... [1]

22) May 2016 [41] Q (5)

5 Sulfuric acid is produced by the Contact process. The steps of the Contact
process are shown.
(a) Sulfur is a common starting material for the Contact process.

Name a source of sulfur.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe step 2, giving reaction conditions and a chemical equation.
Reference to reaction rate and yield is not required.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
(c) Step 3 involves adding sulfur trioxide to concentrated sulfuric acid to form
oleum.
Complete the chemical equation for this reaction.
H2SO4 + SO3 
→ ................................
[1]
23) May 2016 [42] Q (4_f, g)
(f) The electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride can be
represented by the following word equation.
sodium chloride + water 
→ sodium hydroxide + hydrogen + chlorine
Construct a chemical equation to represent this reaction. Do not include state
symbols.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(g) State one use of
chlorine, .............................................................................................................
sodium hydroxide, ..............................................................................................
hydrogen. ...........................................................................................................
[3]

24) Nov 2016 [41] Q (4_a)

4 (a) Ammonia, NH3, is made by reacting nitrogen with hydrogen in the Haber
process.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the formation of ammonia in the Haber
process.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the raw materials from which nitrogen and hydrogen are obtained.
nitrogen ..............................................................................................................
hydrogen ............................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State the temperature and pressure used in the Haber process. Include
the units.
temperature ........................................................................................................
pressure .............................................................................................................
[2]
25) Nov 2016 [42] Q (3_c, d)
(c) Methane contributes to the greenhouse effect.
State two sources of methane.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Combustion and respiration add carbon dioxide to the atmosphere.
Name one natural process which removes carbon dioxide from the
atmosphere.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
26) Nov 2016 [43] Q (5)
5 Sulfuric acid can be manufactured from the raw materials sulfur, air and
water. The process can be divided into four stages.
stage 1 converting sulfur into sulfur dioxide
stage 2 converting sulfur dioxide into sulfur trioxide
stage 3 converting sulfur trioxide into oleum, H2S2O7
stage 4 converting oleum into sulfuric acid

stage 1
(a) (i) Describe how sulfur is converted into sulfur dioxide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the conversion of sulfur into sulfur dioxide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
stage 2
(b) Sulfur dioxide is converted into sulfur trioxide according to the following
equation.
 2SO3
2SO2 + O2 
The reaction is carried out at a temperature of 450 °C and a pressure of 1–2
atmospheres using a catalyst.
The energy change, ΔH, for the reaction is –196 kJ / mol.
 ?
(i) What is the meaning of the symbol 
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the catalyst used in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why is a catalyst used?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) If a temperature higher than 450 °C were used, what would happen to the
amount of sulfur trioxide produced? Give a reason for your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) Suggest a reason why a temperature lower than 450 °C is not used.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) If a pressure higher than 1–2 atmospheres were used, what would
happen to the amount of sulfur trioxide produced? Give a reason for your
answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
stage 3
(c) (i) What is added to sulfur trioxide to convert it into oleum?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the conversion of sulfur trioxide into oleum.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

stage 4
(d) (i) What is added to oleum to convert it into sulfuric acid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the conversion of oleum into sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Give one use of sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
27) May 2017 [42] Q (3_a, c)
3 This question is about nitrogen and some of its compounds.
(a) Nitrogen in the air can be converted into ammonia by the Haber process.
The chemical equation for the reaction is shown.
 2NH3
N2 + 3H2 
(i) State the temperature and pressure used in the Haber process.
temperature ........................................................................................................
pressure .............................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the catalyst used in the Haber process.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Nitrogen(II) oxide can be reacted with oxygen and water to produce nitric
acid as the only product.
Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
28) May 2018 [42] Q (2_f, g)

(f) forms two different oxides during the Contact process
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) is non‑metallic and an important component of fertilisers.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

29) May 2018 [43] Q (1_b, e, f)

1 The following are the symbols and formulae of some elements and
compounds.
Ar Ca(OH)2 Cl2 CO2 Cu Fe SO2 V2O5
Answer the following questions using only the elements or compounds in the
list.
Each element or compound may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(b) as a food preservative ............................................................................. [1]
(e) to neutralise excess acidity in soil ........................................................... [1]
(f) as a catalyst in the Contact process. ........................................................ [1]

327 14 – Organic Chemistry Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 Q (4)

4 Hydrolysis is used in chemistry to break down complex molecules into
simpler ones.
(i) Give the names and formulae of the two compounds formed when the
ester ethyl propanoate is hydrolysed
[4]
(ii) Fats are naturally occurring esters. They can be hydrolysed by boiling with
aqueous sodium hydroxide
What type of compound has the formula C17H35COONa and what is its main
use?
type of compound ......................................................................................... [1]
use ................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Name a synthetic polyester.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The structure of a typical protein is drawn below.
(i) What is the name of the polymer linkage?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structural formula of a man-made polymer with the same linkage.
[3]
2) May 2010 Q (8)
8 Methanoic acid is the first member of the homologous series of carboxylic
acids.
(a) Give two general characteristics of a homologous series.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In some areas when water is boiled, the inside of kettles become coated
with a layer of calcium carbonate. This can be removed by adding methanoic
acid.
(i) Complete the equation.
[2]
(ii) Methanoic acid reacts with most metals above hydrogen in the reactivity
series. Complete the word equation.
(iii) Aluminium is also above hydrogen in the reactivity series.

Why does methanoic acid not react with an aluminium kettle?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Give the name, molecular formula and empirical formula of the fourth acid
in this series.
name ........................................................................................................................ [1]
molecular formula ..................................................................................................... [1]
empirical formula ...................................................................................................... [1]
3) May 2010 [32] Q (2_a)
2 The hydrolysis of complex carbohydrates to simple sugars is catalysed by
enzymes called carbohydrases and also by dilute acids.
(a) (i) They are both catalysts. How do enzymes differ from catalysts such as
dilute acids?
.................................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why ethanol, C2H6O, is not a carbohydrate but glucose, C6H12O6,
is a carbohydrate.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Draw the structure of a complex carbohydrate, such as starch. The
formula of a simple sugar can be represented by
4) May 2010 [32] Q (4)

4 But-1-ene is a typical alkene. It has the structural formula shown below
The structural formula of cyclobutane is given below.
(a) These two hydrocarbons are isomers.

(i) Define the term isomer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Draw the structural formula of another isomer of but-1-ene.
[1]

(iii) Describe a test which would distinguish between but-1-ene and

cyclobutane.
reagent ...............................................................................................................
result with but-1-ene ..........................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
result with cyclobutane .......................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Describe how alkenes, such as but-1-ene, can be made from alkanes.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Name the product formed when but-1-ene reacts with:
bromine, ........................................................................................................ [1]
hydrogen, ...................................................................................................... [1]
steam. ........................................................................................................... [1]
5) Nov 2010 [31] Q (5)
5 Monomers polymerise to form polymers or macromolecules.
(a) (i) Explain the term polymerise.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) There are two types of polymerisation - addition and condensation. What
is the difference between them?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An important monomer is chloroethene which has the structural formula
shown below.
It is made by the following method.

C2H4 + Cl2 
→ C2H4Cl2 dichloroethane
This is heated to make chloroethene.
C2H4Cl2 
→ C2H3Cl + HCl

(i) Ethene is made by cracking alkanes. Complete the equation for cracking
dodecane.
C12H26 
→ ............ + 2C2H4
[1]
Another method of making dichloroethane is from ethane.
C2H6 + 2Cl2 
→ C2H4Cl2 + 2HCl
(ii) Suggest a reason why the method using ethene is preferred.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe an industrial method of making chlorine.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Draw the structural formula of poly(chloroethene). Include three monomer
units.
[2]
6) Nov 2010 [32] Q (5)
5 In the absence of oxygen, certain bacteria decompose carbohydrates to
biogas. This is a mixture of gases mainly methane and carbon dioxide.
Biogas is becoming an increasingly important fuel around the world.
A diagram of a simple biogas generator is given below. Typically, it contains
biomass – animal manure, plant material etc.
(a) (i) What is meant by the term carbohydrate?

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The reaction in the generator is an example of anaerobic respiration.

Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen. What does respiration mean?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The generator must produce some carbon dioxide.
Why is it impossible for it to produce only a hydrocarbon such as methane?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Suggest a use for the nitrogen-rich solid removed from the generator.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) In an experiment, a 60 cm3 sample of biogas required 80 cm3 of oxygen
for the complete combustion of the methane in the sample.
Calculate the percentage of methane in the sample of biogas. Assume that
biogas contains only methane and carbon dioxide.
CH4 + 2O2 
→ CO2 + 2H2O
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Carbon dioxide is acidic and methane is neutral.
Suggest another way of measuring the volume of methane in the sample.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
7) Nov 2010 [32] Q (6)
6 The alcohols form an homologous series.
(a) Give three characteristics of an homologous series.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The following two alcohols are members of the series and they are
isomers.
CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2—OH and (CH3)2CH—CH2OH
(i) Explain why they are isomers.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Give the structural formula of another alcohol which is also an isomer of
these alcohols.
[1]
(c) Copper (II) oxide can oxidise butan-1-ol to liquid X whose pH is 4.
(i) Name another reagent which can oxidise butan-1-ol.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of compound is liquid X and what is its formula?
type of compound ......................................................................................... [1]
formula of liquid X
[1]
(d) The alcohol ethanol can be made by fermentation. Yeast is added to
aqueous glucose.
Carbon dioxide is given off and the mixture becomes warm as the reaction is
exothermic.
The graph shows how the rate of reaction varies over several days.

(i) Suggest a method of measuring the rate of this reaction.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Why does the rate increase initially?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the rate eventually decreases.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Why is fermentation carried out in the absence of air?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
8) Nov 2010 [33] Q (5_a)
5 Carboxylic acids contain the group
(a) Ethanoic acid is a typical carboxylic acid. It forms ethanoates.

(i) Complete the following equations.

(ii) Ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol to form an ester. Give the name of the
ester and draw its structural formula. Show all of the bonds.
name ..................................................................................................................
structural formula
[2]
9) Nov 2010 [33] Q (7)
7 Synthetic polymers are widely used in the modern world.
(a) Their use has brought considerable advantages to modern life as well as
some disadvantages.
(i) Suggest two advantages of a plastic bucket compared to a steel bucket.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name two uses of man-made fibres, such as nylon and Terylene.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Describe the pollution caused by synthetic polymers.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) One type of polymer is formed by addition polymerisation.
(i) The structural formula of an addition polymer is given below.
Give the name and structural formula of the monomer.

name of monomer ......................................................................................... [1]
structural formula of monomer
[1]
(ii) Draw the structural formula of the addition polymer formed by the
polymerisation of phenylethene. The structural formula of phenylethene is
given below.
[2]
(c) Nylon is made by condensation polymerisation. It has the structural
formula shown below.
(i) Name the linkage in this polymer.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the natural macromolecules which have the same linkage.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Deduce the formulae of the two monomers which reacted to form the
nylon and water.
monomer ............................................................................................................
monomer ............................................................................................................
[2]

10) May 2011 [31] Q (6)

The structure formula of butanol is given below
CH3  CH2  CH2  CH2  OH
(a) butanol can be made from petroleum and also by fermentation
(i) describe the chemistry of making butanol from petroleum by the following route
Petroleum 
 butane 
 butanol
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) explain in general term, what is meant by fermentation
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) butanol can be oxidized to a carboxylic acid by heating with acidified
potassium manganate (VII). Give the name and structural formula of the
carboxylic acid
name ………………………………………………………………………………..[1]
Structural formula
[1]
(c) butanol reacts with ethanoic acid to form a liquid X, which has the sweet
smell of bananas. Its empirical formula is C3H6O and its Mr is 116
(i) what type of compound is liquid X?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) give the molecular formula of liquid X
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) draw the structural of X. show all the individual bonds
[2]

11) May 2011 [31] Q (8)

8 There two types of polymerization – addition and condensation
(a) Explain the difference between them
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Poly dichloroethene is used to package food. Draw its structure. The
structural formula of dichloroethene is shown below
[2]
(c) The polymer known a PVA used in paints and adhesives. Its structural
formula shown below
CH2 CH CH2 CH
OOCCH3 OOCCH3
Deduce the structural formula of its monomer
[1]
(d) a condensation polymer can be made from the following monomers
HOOC(CH2 )2COOH and H2N(CH2 )6NH2
Draw the structural formula of this polymer
[3]

12) May 2011 [32] Q (6_b, c)

(b) Biodiesel is made from a vegetable oil by the following reaction.
(i) What type of compound are vegetable oil and biodiesel?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What other useful product is made from vegetable oil by heating it with
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest an explanation why making and using biodiesel has a smaller
effect on the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere than using
petroleum-based diesel.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Petroleum-based diesel is a mixture of hydrocarbons, such as octane and
octene.
(i) ‘Oct’ means eight carbon atoms per molecule. Draw a structural formula of
an octane molecule.
[1]
(ii) Describe a test which would distinguish between octane and octene.
test .....................................................................................................................
result with octane ...............................................................................................
result with octene .......................................................................................... [3]
13) May 2011 [32] Q (8_a, i, b)
8 Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain only carbon and hydrogen.
(a) 20 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon was burned in 120 cm3 of oxygen, which
is in excess. After cooling, the volume of the gases remaining was 90 cm3.
Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to remove carbon dioxide, 30 cm3 of
oxygen remained. All volumes were measured at r.t.p

(i) Explain why it is essential to use excess oxygen.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Alkanes are hydrocarbons and are generally unreactive. Their reactions
include combustion, substitution and cracking.
(i) Chlorine reacts with butane in a substitution reaction.
Give the structural formula of another possible product of this reaction.
[1]
(ii) What is the essential condition for this reaction?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain what is meant by cracking. Give an example of a cracking

reaction and explain why the process is used.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
14) Nov 2011 [31] Q (6)

6 Structural formulae are an essential part of Organic Chemistry.
(a) Draw the structural formula of each of the following. Show all the bonds in
the structure.
(i) ethanoic acid
[1]
(ii) ethanol
[1]

(b) (i) Ethanoic acid and ethanol react to form an ester.

What is the name of this ester?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The same linkage is found in polyesters. Draw the structure of the
polyester which can be formed from the monomers shown below.
HOOC — C6H4 — COOH and HO — CH2 — CH2 — OH
[3]
(iii) Describe the pollution problems caused by non-biodegradable polymers.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Two macromolecules have the same amide linkage.
Nylon, a synthetic polymer, has the following structure.
Protein, a natural macromolecule, has the following structure.
How are they different?

............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

15) Nov 2011 [32] Q (5_a, b, d, e)

5 The alcohols form a homologous series. Two characteristics of a
homologous series are that the physical properties of the members vary in a
predictable way and they have similar chemical properties.
(a) Complete the table.
Mass of one Boiling
Name Formula
mole/g Point/°C
Methanol CH3 – OH 32 64
Ethanol CH3 – CH2 – OH 46 78
Propan-1-ol CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – OH 60 98
Butan-1-ol CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – OH 74 118
Pentan-1-ol 138
Hexan-1-ol CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – OH 102
(b) Give two other characteristics of a homologous series.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Alcohols can be oxidised to carboxylic acids by heating with acidic
potassium manganate(VII).
(i) Draw the structural formula of the carboxylic acid formed by the oxidation
of propan-1-ol. Show all the bonds.
[1]
(ii) Describe how ethanol could be oxidised to ethanoic acid by fermentation.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Propan-1-ol and ethanoic acid react together to form an ester. Give its
name and structural formula.
name ............................................................................................................. [1]
formula
[1]

16) Nov 2011 [32] Q (7_a, b)

7 Petrol is a mixture of hydrocarbons and additives. The combustion of petrol
in car engines is a major source of air pollution. This is reduced by catalytic
converters.
(a) Petrol is obtained from the gasoline fraction, boiling point range 40 °C to
100 C, from the distillation of petroleum. Explain the term fraction.
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) In many countries, a lead compound of the type Pb(C2H5)n used to be
added to petrol to improve its combustion. After combustion, lead oxide was
formed.
(i) Octane is a constituent of petrol. Write the equation for the complete
combustion of octane.
C8H18 + ...............O2 
 ............... + ...............
[2]
(ii) Dibromoethane was added to petrol to remove the lead oxide from inside
the engine.
Lead bromide was formed which escaped into the environment through the
exhaust.
Leaded petrol cannot be used with a catalytic converter. Give another reason
why leaded petrol is no longer used.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What does each of the following tell you about the structure of
dibromoethane?
dibromo ..............................................................................................................
eth ......................................................................................................................
ane ................................................................................................................ [2]
(iv) What additional information is needed to draw the structural formula of
dibromoethane?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

17) Nov 2011 [33] Q (2_a, b)

2 Starch, a complex carbohydrate, is a natural macromolecule or polymer.
It can be formed from its monomer by condensation polymerisation.
(a) (i) Explain the terms:
monomer ............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
condensation polymerisation .............................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Draw the structural formula of starch to include three monomer units.
Glucose, the monomer, can be represented as
[3]
(b) Starch can be hydrolysed to simple sugars by heating with dilute sulfuric
acid or by warming with a dilute solution of saliva. The reaction can be
catalysed by H+ ions from the acid or by the enzymes in saliva.
(i) What is an enzyme?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why, if the saliva / starch mixture is heated above 70 °C, the
hydrolysis stops.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The complete acid-catalysed hydrolysis of starch forms only glucose.
The partial acid-catalysed hydrolysis of starch forms a mixture of sugars
which includes glucose. Describe how you could identify the different sugars
in this mixture.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

18) Nov 2011 [33] Q (7_b, ii, c)

(ii) Draw the structure of the polymer formed from propene
[2]
(c) This question is concerned with some of the addition reactions of but-1-ene.
(i) Name the product formed when but-1-ene reacts with water.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the equation.
CH3 — CH2 — CH = CH2 + Br2 
→ ...................................................... [2]
(iii) Deduce the formula of the compound which reacts with but-1-ene to form
1-iodobutane.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
19) May 2012 [31] Q (6)
6 Butane is an alkane. It has the following structural formula
(a) The equation for the complete combustion of butane is given below. Insert
the two missing volumes.
2C4H10(g) + 13 O2(g) 
→ 8 CO2(g) + 10H2O(g)
....... ........ 40 volume of gas / cm3
[2]
(b) Butane reacts with chlorine to form two isomers of chlorobutane.
(i) What type of reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain the term isomer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Draw the structural formulae of these two chlorobutanes.
[2]
(c) One of the chlorobutanes reacts with sodium hydroxide to form butan-1-ol.
Butan-1-ol can be oxidised to a carboxylic acid.
(i) State a reagent, other than oxygen, which will oxidise butan-1-ol to a
carboxylic acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the carboxylic acid formed.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Butan-1-ol reacts with ethanoic acid to form an ester. Name this ester and
give its structural formula showing all the individual bonds.
name ............................................................................................................. [1]
structural formula
[2]
20) May 2012 [31] Q (7)
7 Plastics are polymers. They are formed from their monomers by
polymerisation.
(a) Two methods for the disposal of waste plastics are
● burning
● recycling.
Describe one advantage and one disadvantage of each method.
burning ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
recycling .............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

(b) (i) There are two types of polymerisation reaction. Give their names and
explain the differences between them.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Give the structural formula of a polymer which is formed from two different
monomers.
[2]
21) May 2012 [32] Q (5)
5 Islay is an island off the west coast of Scotland. The main industry on the
island is making ethanol from barley.
Barley contains the complex carbohydrate, starch. Enzymes catalyse the
hydrolysis of starch to a solution of glucose.
(a) (i) Draw the structure of the starch.
Glucose can be represented by HO OH
[2]
(ii) Enzymes can catalyse the hydrolysis of starch. Name another catalyst for
this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Both starch and glucose are carbohydrates. Name the elements found in
all carbohydrates.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Yeast cells are added to the aqueous glucose. Fermentation produces a
solution containing up to 10 % of ethanol.
(i) Complete the word equation for the fermentation of glucose.
Glucose 
→ .......................... + ..........................
[1]
(ii) Explain why is it necessary to add yeast and suggest why the amount of
yeast in the mixture increases.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Fermentation is carried out at 35 °C. For many reactions a higher
temperature would give a faster reaction. Why is a higher temperature not
used in this process?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The organic waste, the residue of the barley and yeast, is disposed of
through a pipeline into the sea. In the future this waste will be converted into
biogas by the anaerobic respiration of bacteria. Biogas, which is mainly
methane, will supply most of the island’s energy.
(i) Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen. Suggest an explanation why
oxygen must be absent.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The obvious advantage of converting the waste into methane is economic.
Suggest two other advantages.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
22) May 2012 [32] Q (7)
7 The alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbons. They form a homologous
series, the members of which have similar chemical properties:
● easily oxidised
● addition reactions
● polymerisation
● combustion.
(a) All the alkenes have the same empirical formula.
(i) State their empirical formula.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Why is the empirical formula the same for all alkenes?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Alkenes can be oxidised to carboxylic acids by boiling with aqueous
potassium manganate(VII).
(i) Pent-2-ene, CH3–CH2–CH=CH–CH3, oxidises to CH3–CH2–COOH and
CH3COOH.
Name these two acids.
CH3–CH2–COOH ..............................................................................................
CH3COOH ..................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Most alkenes oxidise to two carboxylic acids. Deduce the formula of an
alkene which forms only one carboxylic acid.
[1]
(c) Complete the following equations for the addition reactions of propene.
(i) CH3–CH=CH2 + Br2 
→ .................................... [1]
(ii) CH3–CH=CH2 + H2O 

→ .................................... [1]
(d) Draw the structural formula of poly(propene)
[2]
(e) 0.01 moles of an alkene needed 2.4 g of oxygen for complete combustion.
2.2 g of carbon dioxide were formed. Determine the following mole ratio.
moles of alkene : moles of O2 : moles of CO2
From this ratio determine the formula of the alkene.

....................................................................................................................... [3]
Write an equation for the complete combustion of this alkene.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

23) Nov 2012 [31] Q (6)

6 A sandwich contains three of the main constituents of food.
(a) (i) These constituents of food can be hydrolysed by boiling with acid or
alkali.
Complete the table.
[3]
(ii) What type of synthetic polymer contains the same linkage as
fats, ......................................................
proteins? .............................................. [2]
(b) An incomplete structural formula of a protein is given below.
Complete this diagram by inserting the linkages.
(c) Butter contains mainly saturated fats. Fats based on vegetable oils, such
as olive oil, contain mainly unsaturated fats.
A small amount of fat was dissolved in an organic solvent.

Describe how you could determine if the fat was saturated or unsaturated.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
24) Nov 2012 [32] Q (3_a, b)
3 Many organic compounds which contain a halogen have chloro, bromo or
iodo in their name.
(a) The following diagram shows the structure of 1-chloropropane.
(i) Draw the structure of an isomer of this compound.
[1]
(ii) Describe how 1-chloropropane could be made from propane.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest an explanation why the method you have described in (ii) does
not produce a pure sample of 1-chloropropane.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Organic halides react with water to form an alcohol and a halide ion.
→ CH3 − CH2 − OH + I−
CH3 − CH2 − I + H2O 
(i) Describe how you could show that the reaction mixture contained an iodide
ion.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the alcohol formed when 1-chloropropane reacts with water.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

25) Nov 2012 [32] Q (7_a, i, ii, c)

methanol, CH3OH.
(a) (i) Give the general formula of the alcohols.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The mass of one mole of an alcohol is 116 g. What is its formula?
Show your reasoning.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Methanol is oxidised by atmospheric oxygen. This reaction is catalysed by
platinum.
(i) The products of this reaction include a carboxylic acid. Give its name and
structural formula.
name .......................................................
structural formula showing all bonds
[2]
(ii) Deduce the name of the ester formed by the reaction of methanol with the
carboxylic acid named in (i).
....................................................................................................................... [1]
26) Nov 2012 [33] Q (5)
5 Propenoic acid is an unsaturated carboxylic acid. The structural formula of
propenoic acid is given below
(a) (i) Describe how you could show that propenoic acid is an unsaturated
compound.
test .....................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Without using an indicator, describe how you could show that a compound
is an acid.
test .....................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Propenoic acid reacts with ethanol to form an ester. Deduce the name of
this ester. Draw its structural formula.
name of ester .....................................................................................................
structural formula showing all bonds
[3]
(c) An organic compound has a molecular formula C6H8O4. It is an
unsaturated carboxylic acid. One mole of the compound reacts with two moles
of sodium hydroxide.
(i) Explain the phrase molecular formula.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) One mole of this carboxylic acid reacts with two moles of sodium
hydroxide.
How many moles of –COOH groups are there in one mole of this compound?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What is the formula of another functional group in this compound?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Deduce a structural formula of this compound.
[1]

27) May 2013 [31] Q (1)

1 Petroleum contains hydrocarbons which are separated by fractional
distillation.
(a) (i) Complete the following definition of a hydrocarbon.
A hydrocarbon is a compound ...........................................................................
……………………………………………………………………………...………. [2]
(ii) Explain what is meant by the term fractional distillation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Some of the fractions obtained from petroleum are given below.
State a use for each fraction.
bitumen ....................................................................
lubricating fraction ...................................................
paraffin fraction ........................................................
gasoline fraction ...................................................... [4]
28) May 2013 [31] Q (4)
4 The structural formula of cyclohexane is drawn below.
(a) The name gives information about the structure of the compound.
Hex because there are six carbon atoms and cyclo because they are joined
in a ring.
What information about the structure of this compound is given by the ending
ane?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) What are the molecular and empirical formulae of cyclohexane?
molecular formula .............................
empirical formula .............................. [2]

(c) Draw the structural formula of cyclobutane.
[1]
(d) (i) Deduce the molecular formula of hexene.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why cyclohexane and the alkene, hexene, are isomers.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Describe a test which would distinguish between cyclohexane and the
unsaturated hydrocarbon hexene.
test .....................................................................................................................
result of test with cyclohexane ...........................................................................
............................................................................................................................
result of test with hexene ...................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
29) May 2013 [32] Q (4_b i)
(b) Two other ways of producing hydrogen are cracking and electrolysis.
(i) Hydrogen can be a product of the cracking of long chain alkanes.
Complete the equation for the cracking of C8H18.
C8H18 
→ 2............ + H2
[1]
30) May 2013 [32] Q (5)
5 Many monomer molecules react together to form one molecule of a
polymer. This reaction is called polymerisation.
(a) The structural formula of the polymer, poly(chloroethene), is given below.
This polymer is also known as PVC.

(i) A major use of PVC is insulation of electric cables. PVC is a poor

Suggest another property which makes it suitable for this use.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) One way of disposing of waste PVC is by burning it. This method has the
disadvantage that poisonous gases are formed.
Suggest two poisonous gases which could be formed by the combustion of
PVC.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Deduce the structural formula of the monomer from that of the polymer.
structural formula of monomer
[1]
(ii) Deduce the structural formula of the polymer, poly(phenylethene), from the
formula of its monomer, phenylethene.
structural formula of polymer
[2]

(c) The carbohydrate, glucose, polymerises to form the more complex

carbohydrate starch.
If glucose is represented by
then the structural formula of starch is as drawn below.
How does the polymerisation of glucose differ from that of an alkene such as
phenylethene?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
31) May 2013 [32] Q (7_a, b)
7 The ester linkage showing all the bonds is drawn as
or more simply it can be written as –COO–.

(a) (i) Give the structural formula of the ester ethyl ethanoate.
[1]
(ii) Deduce the name of the ester formed from methanoic acid and butanol.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Which group of naturally occurring compounds contains the ester
linkage?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Draw the structural formula of the polyester formed from the following
monomers.
HOOCC6H4COOH and HOCH2CH2OH
You are advised to use the simpler form of the ester linkage.
[3]
32) May 2013 [33] Q (6_a, b)
6 Sulfuric acid and malonic acid are both dibasic acids. One mole of a dibasic
acid can form two moles of hydrogen ions.
→ 2H+ + SO24−
H2SO4 
Dibasic acids can form salts of the type Na2X and CaX.
(a) Malonic acid is a white crystalline solid which is soluble in water. It melts at
135 °C. The structural formula of malonic acid is given below. It forms salts
called malonates.
CH2(COOH)2 or HOOC – CH2 – COOH
(i) How could you determine if a sample of malonic acid is pure?
technique used ...................................................................................................
result if pure .................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) What is the molecular formula of malonic acid?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) When malonic acid is heated there are two products, carbon dioxide and
a simpler carboxylic acid. Deduce the name and molecular formula of this
acid.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Malonic acid reacts with ethanol to form a colourless liquid which has a
‘fruity’ smell.
Its structural formula is given below.
What type of compound contains the group which is circled?

....................................................................................................................... [1]

33) May 2013 [33] Q (7_a, b, c)

7 Alkanes and alkenes are both series of hydrocarbons.
(a) (i) Explain the term hydrocarbon.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the difference between these two series of hydrocarbons?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Alkenes and simpler alkanes are made from long-chain alkanes by
cracking.
Complete the following equation for the cracking of the alkane C20H42.
C20H42 
→ 2C4H8 + 2C2H4 + ...............
[1]
(c) Alkenes such as butene and ethene are more reactive than alkanes.
Alkenes are used in the petrochemical industry to make a range of products,
which includes polymers and alcohols.
(i) Dibromoethane is used as a pesticide. Complete the equation for its
preparation from ethene.
[1]
(ii) The structural formula of a poly(alkene) is given below.
Deduce the structural formula of its monomer.
[2]

(iii) How is butanol made from butene, CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2? Include an
equation in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Cracking changes alkanes into alkenes. How could an alkene be
converted into an alkane? Include an equation in your answer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
34) Nov 2013 [31] Q (5)
5 The alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbons. They form a homologous
series, the members of which have the same chemical properties.
They undergo addition reactions and are easily oxidised.
(a) The following hydrocarbons are isomers.
(i) Explain why these two hydrocarbons are isomers.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give the structural formula of another hydrocarbon which is isomeric with
the above.
[1]
(b) Give the structural formula and name of each of the products of the
following addition reactions.
(i) ethene and bromine
structural formula of product
name of product ............................................................................................ [2]

(ii) propene and hydrogen

name of product ............................................................................................ [2]

(iii) but-1-ene and water
name of product ............................................................................................ [2]

(c) Alkenes can be oxidised to carboxylic acids.
(i) For example, propene, CH3 – CH = CH2, would produce ethanoic acid,
CH3 − COOH , and methanoic acid, H – COOH. Deduce the formulae of the
alkenes which would form the following carboxylic acids when oxidised.
ethanoic acid and propanoic acid
only ethanoic acid
[2]
(ii) Describe the colour change you would observe when an alkene is oxidised
with acidified potassium manganate(VII).
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Alkenes polymerise to form addition polymers.
Draw the structural formula of poly(cyanoethene), include at least two
monomer units.
The structural formula of the monomer, cyanoethene, is given below.

[3]
35) Nov 2013 [31] Q (7_a)
7 (a) The following are two examples of substitution reactions. Only the
reaction involving chlorine is a photochemical reaction.
(i) Explain the phrase substitution reaction.

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) How do photochemical reactions differ from other reactions?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
36) Nov 2013 [32] Q (7)
7 Plants can make complex molecules from simple starting materials, such as
water, carbon dioxide and nitrates. Substances produced by plants include
sugars, more complex carbohydrates, esters, proteins, vegetable oils and
fats.
(a) (i) Describe how you could decide from its molecular formula whether a
compound is a carbohydrate.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Plants can change the sugar, glucose, into starch which is a more complex
carbohydrate. What type of reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The fermentation of glucose can be carried out in the apparatus shown
below. After a few days the reaction stops. A 12% aqueous solution of ethanol
has been produced.

(i) The enzyme, zymase, catalyses the anaerobic respiration of the yeast.
Explain the term respiration.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Complete the equation.
C6H12O6 
→ ......................... + ................................... [2]
glucose ethanol carbon dioxide
(iii) Why must air be kept out of the flask?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The ester methyl butanoate is found in apples. It can be made from
butanoic acid and methanol. Their structural formulae are given below.
Use the information given above to deduce the structural formula of methyl
butanoate showing all the bonds.
[2]
(d) The equation represents the hydrolysis of a naturally occurring ester.
(i) Which substance in the equation is an alcohol? Put a ring around this
substance in the equation above. [1]
(ii) Is the alkyl group, C17H35, in this ester saturated or unsaturated? Give a
reason for your choice.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What type of compound is represented by the formula C17H35COONa?
What is the major use for compounds of this type?
type of compound ..............................................................................................
use ................................................................................................................ [2]
(e) Proteins are natural macromolecules. Draw the structural formula of a
typical protein. Include three monomer units. You may represent amino acids
by formulae of the type drawn below.
[3]
37) Nov 2013 [33] Q (5_b, c, d)
5 Domestic rubbish is disposed of in landfill sites. Rubbish could include the
following items.

(b) Both paper and cotton are complex carbohydrates. They can be
hydrolysed to simple sugars such as glucose.
The formula of glucose can be represented as:
Draw the structural formula of a complex carbohydrate, such as cotton.

Include at least two glucose units.
[2]
(c) Wool is a protein. It can be hydrolysed to a mixture of monomers by
enzymes.
(i) What are enzymes?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name another substance which can hydrolyse proteins.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What type of compound are the monomers formed by the hydrolysis of
proteins?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which technique could be used to identify the individual monomers in the
mixture?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Proteins contain the amide linkage. Name a synthetic macromolecule
which contains the same linkage.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) (i) What is the scientific term used to describe polymers which do not
break down in landfill sites?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Styrofoam is poly(phenylethene). It is an addition polymer. Its structural

formula is given below. Deduce the structural formula of the monomer,
phenylethene.
[1]
38) Nov 2013 [33] Q (6)
(6) a
(i) Complete the table. [2]

(ii) Complete the equation for the combustion of pentan-1-ol in excess
oxygen.
C5H11OH + .......O2 
→ ..................... + ..................... [1]
(b) State three characteristics of a homologous series other than the variation
of physical properties down the series.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The following alcohols are isomers.
CH3–CH2–CH2–CH2–OH and (CH3)2CH–CH2–OH
(i) Explain why they are isomers.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Draw the structural formula of another isomer of the above alcohols.
[1]
(d) Alcohols can be made by fermentation and from petroleum.
(i) Ethanol is made from sugars by fermentation.
C6H12O6 
→ 2C2H5OH + 2CO2
The mass of one mole of glucose, C6H12O6, is 180 g.
Calculate the maximum mass of ethanol which could be obtained from 72 g of
glucose.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe how ethanol is made from petroleum.
petroleum (alkanes) → ethene → ethanol
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
39) May 2014 [31] Q (8)
8 Polymers are made by the polymerisation of simple molecules called
monomers.
(a) (i) The structural formula of a polymer is given below.

This polymer is made by addition polymerisation. Draw the structural formula

of its monomer.
[1]
(ii) The two monomers shown below form a nylon which is a condensation
polymer.
Draw its structural formula showing one repeat unit of the polymer.
[3]
(iii) Name the natural macromolecule which contains the same linkage as
nylon.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain the difference between addition polymerisation and condensation
polymerisation.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Many polymers are non-biodegradable.
(i) Explain the term non-biodegradable.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State three problems caused by the disposal of non-biodegradable

polymers.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Storage tanks for cold water are now made from polymers because they
are cheaper than metal tanks. Suggest two other advantages of making cold
water tanks from polymers.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
40) May 2014 [32] Q (2)
2 (a) Natural gas, which is mainly methane, is a fossil fuel.
(i) What is meant by the term fuel ?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name two other fossil fuels.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name a solid fuel which is not a fossil fuel.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fossil fuels are formed by the anaerobic decomposition of organic matter.
Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen.
(i) The organic matter contains hydrogen and carbon. Suggest the products
that would be formed if the decomposition occurred in the presence of
oxygen.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What are the two main disadvantages in the widespread use of fossil
fuels?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
41) May 2014 [32] Q (4_a, b, c)
4 Propanoic acid is a carboxylic acid. Its formula is CH3–CH2–COOH.
(a) Propanoic acid is the third member of the homologous series of carboxylic
acids.
(i) Give the name and structural formula of the fourth member of this series.
name ..................................................................................................................
formula .......................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Members of a homologous series have very similar chemical properties.

State three other characteristics of a homologous series.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Carboxylic acids can be made by the oxidation of alcohols.
(i) Draw the structural formula of the alcohol which can be oxidised to
propanoic acid.
Show all atoms and bonds.
[1]
(ii) Name a reagent, other than oxygen, which can oxidise alcohols to
carboxylic acids.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Complete the following equations for some of the reactions of propanoic
acid. The salts of this acid are called propanoates.
42) May 2014 [33] Q (3_b)

(b) Pea seeds grow in pods on pea plants.
Freshly picked pea seeds contain a sugar. The sugar can form a polymer.

Give the structural formula of the polymer and name the other product of this
polymerization reaction.
You may represent the sugar by the formula:
structural formula of the polymer
other product ................................................................................................. [3]

43) May 2014 [33] Q (6)
6 The alkanes are a family of saturated hydrocarbons. Their reactions include
combustion, cracking and substitution.
(a) (i) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is meant by the term saturated?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) What is the general formula for the homologous series of alkanes?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the mass of one mole of an alkane with 14 carbon atoms.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The complete combustion of hydrocarbons produces carbon dioxide and
water only.
(i) Write the equation for the complete combustion of nonane, C9H20.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) 20 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon was mixed with an excess of oxygen,
200 cm3. The mixture was ignited. After cooling, 40 cm3 of oxygen and 100
cm3 of carbon dioxide remained. Deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon and
the equation for its combustion. All volumes were measured at r.t.p..
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Cracking is used to obtain short-chain alkanes, alkenes and hydrogen

from long-chain alkanes.
(i) Give a use for each of the three products listed above.
short-chain alkanes ............................................................................................
alkenes ...............................................................................................................
hydrogen ....................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Write an equation for the cracking of decane, C10H22, which produces two
different alkenes and hydrogen as the only products.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Chlorine reacts with propane in a substitution reaction to form 1-chloropropane.
CH3 – CH2 – CH3 + Cl2 
→ CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl + HCl
(i) What is the essential condition for the above reaction?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) There is more than one possible substitution reaction between chlorine
and propane.
Suggest the structural formula of a different product.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
44) Nov 2014 [31] Q (6)
6 Esters, polyesters and fats all contain the ester linkage.
(a) Esters can be made from alcohols and carboxylic acids. For example, the
ester ethyl ethanoate can be made by the following reaction.
CH3COOH + CH3CH2OH 
→ CH3COOCH2CH3 + H2O
(i) Name the carboxylic acid and the alcohol from which the following ester
could be made.
name of carboxylic acid .....................................................................................

name of alcohol ..............................................................................................[2]
(ii) 6.0 g of ethanoic acid, Mr = 60, was reacted with 5.5 g of ethanol, Mr = 46.
Determine which is the limiting reagent and the maximum yield of ethyl
ethanoate, Mr = 88.
number of moles of ethanoic acid = .............................................................. [1]
number of moles of ethanol = ....................................................................... [1]
the limiting reagent is .................................................................................... [1]

number of moles of ethyl ethanoate formed = .............................................. [1]

maximum yield of ethyl ethanoate = ............................................................. [1]
(b) The following two monomers can form a polyester.
Draw the structural formula of this polyester. Include two ester linkages.
[3]
(c) Fats and vegetable oils are esters. The formulae of two examples of
natural esters are given below.
(i) One ester is saturated, the other is unsaturated.

Describe a test to distinguish between them.
test .....................................................................................................................
result with unsaturated ester ..............................................................................
............................................................................................................................
result with saturated ester ..................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Deduce which one of the above esters is unsaturated. Give a reason for
your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Both esters are hydrolysed by boiling with aqueous sodium hydroxide.
What types of compound are formed?
...................................................... and ......................................................... [2]

45) Nov 2014 [32] Q (3)

3 (a) A hydrocarbon has the following structural formula.
(i) State the molecular formula and the empirical formula of this hydrocarbon.
molecular formula ..............................................................................................
empirical formula ................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Draw the structural formula of an isomer of the above hydrocarbon.
[1]
(iii) Explain why these two hydrocarbons are isomers.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Are these two hydrocarbons members of the same homologous series?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Alkenes can be made from alkanes by cracking.
(i) Explain the term cracking.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) One mole of an alkane, when cracked, produced one mole of hexane,
C6H14, and two moles of ethene.
What is the molecular formula of the original alkane?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Alkenes are used in polymerisation reactions and addition reactions.

(i) Draw the structural formula of the product formed by the addition
polymerisation of but-2-ene. Its formula is given below.
[3]
(ii) Give the name and structural formula of the addition product formed from
ethene and bromine.
name ..................................................................................................................
structural formula
[2]
46) Nov 2014 [32] Q (5_a, b)
5 (a) Glucose, sucrose and starch are all carbohydrates. Their formulae are:
glucose, C6H12O6,
sucrose, C12H22O11,
starch, (C6H10O5)n.
(i) Identify two common features in the formulae of these carbohydrates.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Draw the structure of a complex carbohydrate, such as starch. The
formula of glucose, can be represented by

Include three glucose units in the structure.
[2]
(b) Starch hydrolyses to glucose in the presence of the enzyme, amylase.
What is meant by the term enzyme?
....................................................................................................................... [2]
47) Nov 2014 [33] Q (7)
7 Butane is oxidised to a mixture of carboxylic acids by oxygen in the
presence of a catalyst.
The acids formed are methanoic acid, ethanoic acid and propanoic acid – the
first three members of the carboxylic acid homologous series.
(a) (i) Give the name and structural formula of the fourth member of this
series.
name ..................................................................................................................
structural formula showing all the atoms and bonds
[3]
(ii) State three characteristics of a homologous series.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) All members of this series are weak acids.
What is meant by the term weak acid?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Carboxylic acids react with alcohols to form esters. Ethanol reacts with
ethanoic acid to form the ester ethyl ethanoate, CH3COOCH2CH3.
(i) Give the name and formula of the ester which is formed from methanol and
propanoic acid.
name ..................................................................................................................
formula ...............................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) What is the name of the ester which has the formula CH3COOCH3?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) Complete the equation for the oxidation of butane to propanoic acid.
3 C4H10 + ......... O2 
→ 4 C2H5COOH + ....... H2O
[1]
(ii) Name another compound which can be oxidised to propanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
48) May 2015 [31] Q (4)
4 The alcohols form a homologous series.
(a) (i) Give three characteristics which all members of a homologous series
share.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Give the name of the third member of this series.
name ......................................... [1]
(iii) Deduce the molecular formula of the alcohol whose Mr = 158. Show your
working.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why the following two alcohols are isomers.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) This question is based on typical reactions of butan-1-ol.

(i) When butan-1-ol, CH3–CH2–CH2–CH2–OH, is passed over the catalyst
silicon(IV) oxide, water is lost.
Deduce the name and the structural formula of the organic product in this
reaction.
name .........................................
structural formula
[2]
(ii) Suggest the name of the ester formed from butanol and ethanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Butan-1-ol is oxidised by acidified potassium manganate(VII).
Deduce the name and the structural formula of the organic product in this
reaction.
name .........................................
structural formula
[2]
49) May 2015 [32] Q (7)
7 Alcohols can be made by fermentation or from petroleum.
(a) Ethanol can be made by the fermentation of glucose.
C6H12O6(aq) 
yeast
→ 2 C2H5OH(aq) + 2 CO2(g) exothermic reaction
Yeast are living single-cell fungi which ferment glucose by anaerobic

respiration. This reaction is catalysed by enzymes from the yeast.
(i) What is meant by the term respiration?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen.

Name the products formed from respiration in the presence of oxygen.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What are enzymes?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Suggest a method of measuring the rate of this reaction.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The following observations were noted.
• When a small amount of yeast was added to the aqueous glucose the
reaction started and the solution went slightly cloudy.
• The reaction rate increased and the solution became cloudier and warmer.
• After a while, the reaction rate decreased and eventually stopped, leaving a
14% solution of ethanol in water.
(i) Why did the reaction rate increase?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest an explanation for the increase in cloudiness of the solution.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give two reasons why the fermentation stopped.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) One use of ethanol is in alcoholic drinks.
Give two other uses of ethanol.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Alcohols can be made from petroleum by the following sequence of

reactions.
alkanes from petroleum 
→ alkene 
→ alcohol
Describe the manufacture of ethanol from hexane, C6H14. Include in your
description an equation and type of reaction for each step.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]

50) May 2015 [33] Q (7)

7 (a) Alkanes and alkenes are both hydrocarbons.
(i) How does the structure of alkenes differ from the structure of alkanes?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Is the straight-chain hydrocarbon C22H44 an alkane or an alkene? Explain
your choice.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Describe how you could distinguish between pentane and pentene.
test .....................................................................................................................
result with pentane .............................................................................................
result with pentene .............................................................................................
[3]
(b) Alkenes polymerise to form poly(alkenes).
(i) The alkene 1,1-dichloroethene has the structural formula given below.
Draw the structural formula of the polymer formed by the polymerisation of

1,1-dichloroethene.
[3]
(ii) The structural formula of a different polymer is given below.
Deduce the structural formula of the monomer used to form this polymer.
[2]

(iii) There are two types of polymerisation - addition and condensation.

Explain the difference between them.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) There are two types of condensation polymer.
Give the name of one type of condensation polymer.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
51) Nov 2015 [31] Q (4)
4 (a) Synthetic polymers are disposed of in landfill sites and by burning.
(i) Describe two problems caused by the disposal of synthetic polymers in
landfill sites.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe one problem caused by burning synthetic polymers.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State two uses of synthetic polymers.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The structural formulae of two synthetic polymers are given below.
(i) Draw the structural formula of the monomer of polymer A.
[2]
(ii) Identify the functional group circled in polymer B.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Deduce the two types of organic compound which have reacted to form
polymer B.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Explain the difference between addition and condensation polymers.
Classify A and B as either addition or condensation polymers.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
52) Nov 2015 [31] Q (5)
5 (a) A compound, X, contains 55.85% carbon, 6.97% hydrogen and 37.18%
oxygen.
(i) How does this prove that compound X contains only carbon, hydrogen and
oxygen?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use the above percentages to calculate the empirical formula of
compound X.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The Mr of X is 86.
What is its molecular formula?
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Bromine water changes from brown to colourless when added to X.
What does this tell you about the structure of X?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Magnesium powder reacts with an aqueous solution of X. Hydrogen is
evolved.
What does this tell you about the structure of X?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) X contains two different functional groups.

Draw a structural formula of X.
[1]
53) Nov 2015 [32] Q (4_a, c, d)
4 (a) Propane reacts with chlorine to form a mixture of chloropropanes. This is
a photochemical reaction.
(i) What is meant by the phrase photochemical reaction?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The products of this reaction include two isomers, one of which has the
following structural formula.
Draw the structural formula of the other isomer.
[1]
(iii) Explain why these two different compounds are isomers.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) Chloropropane can be hydrolysed to propanol, CH3CH2CH2OH, by
sodium hydroxide.
Write the equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Propanol can be dehydrated. It loses a water molecule to form a
hydrocarbon.
Give the name and structural formula of this hydrocarbon.
name .................................................
structural formula
[2]

(iii) Propanol is oxidised to a carboxylic acid by acidified potassium

manganate(VII).
Deduce the name of this acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Propanol reacts with methanoic acid to form the ester propyl methanoate.
CH3CH2CH2OH + HCOOH 
→ HCOOCH2CH2CH3 + H2O
4.0 g of methanoic acid was reacted with 6.0 g of propanol.
(i) Calculate the Mr of methanoic acid = ....................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the Mr of propanol = ................................................................ [1]
(iii) Determine which one is the limiting reagent. Show your reasoning.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Calculate the maximum yield in grams of propyl methanoate, Mr = 88.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
54) Nov 2015 [33] Q (4)
4 Two homologous series of hydrocarbons are the alkanes and the alkenes.
(a) (i) One general characteristic of a homologous series is that the physical
properties vary in a predictable way.
State three other general characteristics of a homologous series.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) How can the molecular formula of a hydrocarbon show whether it is an
alkane or an alkene?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) How do alkanes and alkenes differ in their molecular structures?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Cracking is the thermal decomposition of alkanes into smaller
hydrocarbons and possibly hydrogen.
(i) State two conditions required for the cracking of an alkane.
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) One type of cracking produces an alkane and an alkene.

Complete an equation for the cracking of heptane into an alkane and an
alkene.
C7H16 
→ ................ + ................
[1]
(iii) Complete an equation for the cracking of heptane into hydrogen and two
other products.
C7H16 
→ ................ + ................ + H2
[1]
(iv) Suggest one reason why cracking is important.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Hydrocarbons burn in excess oxygen to form carbon dioxide and water. 20
cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon burned in an excess of oxygen, 200 cm3. After
cooling, the volume of the residual gas at r.t.p. was 150 cm3, 50 cm3 of which
was oxygen.
(i) Determine the volume of the oxygen used.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Determine the volume of the carbon dioxide formed.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The hydrocarbon was an alkane.
Determine the formula of the hydrocarbon.
[1]
55) May 2016 [41] Q (6)
6 Petroleum is a source of many important chemicals.
(a) Name two industrial processes which must take place to produce alkenes
from petroleum.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Ethene, CH2=CH2, and propene, CH2=CHCH3, can both be converted into
polymers.
(i) What type of polymerisation takes place when ethene forms a polymer?
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) What is the empirical formula of the polymer formed from ethene?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Propene has the structural formula CH2=CHCH3.
Draw two repeat units of the polymer made from propene.
[2]
(c) Ethene will react with steam to form ethanol.
Propene will react with steam to form two isomers, both of which are alcohols.
Suggest the structures of these alcohols.
[2]
(d) Esters are organic chemicals noted for their characteristic smells. Ethanoic
acid and methanol will react to form an ester.
(i) Name the catalyst needed to form an ester from ethanoic acid and
methanol.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the ester formed when ethanoic acid reacts with methanol.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw the structure of the ester formed when ethanoic acid reacts with
methanol. Show all bonds.
[2]
(iv) Give the name of a polyester.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

56) May 2016 [42] Q (5)

5 (a) Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain hydrogen and carbon only.
• 10 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon, CxHy, are burned in 100 cm3 of
oxygen, which is an excess of oxygen.
• After cooling to room temperature and pressure, there is 25 cm3 of
unreacted oxygen, 50 cm3 of carbon dioxide and some liquid water.
All volumes are measured under the same conditions of temperature and
pressure.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the table below to express the smallest whole number ratio of
volume of
volume of volume of
: : carbon dioxide
produced
volume of
volume of volume of
carbon dioxide
produced
smallest whole
number ratio of
volumes
[1]
(iv) Use your answer to (a)(iii) to find the mole ratio in the equation below.
Complete the equation and deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon.
.........C xHy(g) + .........O2(g) 
→ .........CO2(g) + .........H2O(l)
formula of hydrocarbon = ...........................................

[2]
(b) Cracking is used to convert long chain alkanes into shorter chain alkanes
and alkenes. Alkenes are unsaturated compounds.
Decane, C10H22, can be cracked to give propene and one other product.
(i) Complete the chemical equation.
C10H22 
→ C3H6 + ...............
[1]

(ii) What is meant by the term unsaturated?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe a test to show that propene is an unsaturated compound.
test .....................................................................................................................
result ..................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Propene can be polymerised. The only product is polypropene. The
equation for the polymerisation is:
(i) Name the type of polymerisation that occurs.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Deduce the maximum mass of polypropene that could be produced from 1
kg of propene.
............... kg [1]
(iii) Give the empirical formula of
propene, .............................................................................................................
polypropene. ......................................................................................................
[2]
57) May 2016 [43] Q (2)
2 The structures of six organic compounds are shown.

(a) Give the name of F.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Identify two of the compounds that are members of the same homologous
series.
Give the general formula of this homologous series.
compounds ........................................................................................................
general formula ..................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Which two compounds are isomers of each other?
Explain why they are isomers.
compounds ........................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) Explain why B is an unsaturated hydrocarbon.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Describe how D is manufactured from B. Give a chemical equation for the
reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(f) Compound A forms an addition polymer.
Draw two repeat units of the addition polymer formed from A.
[2]

58) May 2016 [43] Q (6_d, e)

(d) Nylon and proteins are both polymers containing nitrogen.
(i) Name the linkages found in the polymers of nylon and protein.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe one difference in the structures of nylon and protein.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What is the general name given to the products of hydrolysis of proteins?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Suggest the structure of the monomer used to make the polymer shown.
[1]
59) Nov 2016 [41] Q (3_a, b, c, d, e, i)
3 (a) Petroleum is a mixture of hydrocarbons. It is separated into useful
fractions by fractional distillation. This can be done using the fractionating
column shown.

(i) What happens to the petroleum at point X, before it enters the fractionating
column?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two ways in which fraction O differs from fraction L.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Most of the hydrocarbons obtained from petroleum are alkanes. The
alkanes are an homologous series of saturated hydrocarbons with the general
formula CnH2n+2.
Give two characteristics, other than having the same general formula, of
members of an homologous series.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The alkane with the molecular formula C5H12 can exist as a number of
structural isomers.
Draw the structures of two isomers with the formula C5H12.
[2]
(d) The alkane ethane has the structure shown.
When a mixture of ethane and chlorine is exposed to ultraviolet light a

substitution reaction takes place.
Draw the structure of one organic product from this substitution reaction.
[1]

(e) Isoprene is a naturally occurring hydrocarbon.

(i) Explain how the name of isoprene suggests that it contains a C=C double
bond.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
60) Nov 2016 [41] Q (6)
6 Nylon, Terylene and proteins are all polymers.
(a) What is a polymer?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Proteins are natural polymers. Proteins are biodegradable.
(i) Name the type of linkage in proteins.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is meant by the term biodegradable?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name another natural polymer.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Nylon and Terylene are synthetic polymers.
The repeat unit of nylon can be shown as
Terylene can be made from the monomers shown.
Draw a diagram to show the repeat unit of Terylene.
[3]
61) Nov 2016 [42] Q (5_c, d)

(c) When one mole of bromine, Br2, reacts with one mole of propene, one
organic product is formed.
(i) Which part of the propene molecule reacts with bromine?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the name of the type of reaction which takes place between
bromine and propene?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) When one mole of chlorine, Cl2, reacts with one mole of propane, a
mixture of two structural isomers is formed.
(i) What is the name of the type of reaction which takes place between
chlorine and propane?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain what is meant by the term structural isomers.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Draw the structure of two structural isomers formed when one mole of
chlorine reacts with one mole of propane.
[2]
62) Nov 2016 [42] Q (7_a, b, d)
7 Proteins are a major constituent of food.
Proteins are polymers.
(a) What is a polymer?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Proteins can be converted into amino acids.
(i) Name the type of chemical reaction which occurs when proteins are
converted into amino acids.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest a condition needed to convert proteins into amino acids.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) When one molecule of an amino acid A combines with one molecule of
another amino acid B, two different dipeptide molecules could be formed.
Draw the structures of the two different dipeptide molecules.
Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkages.
[3]
63) Nov 2016 [43] Q (6_a, b, d)
6 Synthetic polyamides are made by condensation polymerisation.
(a) (i) What is meant by the term condensation polymerisation?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name another type of polymerisation.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) One repeat unit of a synthetic polyamide is represented by the following
structure.
(i) Draw a ring around the amide link. [1]

(ii) Complete the diagrams to show the structures of the monomers used to
produce the synthetic polyamide. Show all the missing atoms and bonds.
[2]
(iii) Name an example of a synthetic polyamide.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Proteins and synthetic polyamides have similarities and differences.
(i) Name the type of compounds that are the monomers used to make up
proteins.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Starting with a sample of protein, describe how to produce, separate,
detect and identify the monomers which make it up.
Your answer should include
• the name of the process used to break down the protein into its monomers,
• the name of the process used to separate the monomers,
• the method used to detect the monomers after they have been separated,
• the method used to identify the monomers after they have been separated.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [4]

64) May 2017 [41] Q (6)

6 The alkenes and alkanes are both examples of homologous series which
are hydrocarbons.
(a) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Give three characteristics of an homologous series.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
3 .........................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Name and draw the structure of the second member of the alkene
homologous series.
Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
name ..................................................................................................................
structure
[2]
(d) Alcohols can be made from alkenes.
Name the reagent and conditions needed to convert an alkene into an
alcohol.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) The alcohol butanol, CH3CH2CH2CH2OH, can be converted into a
carboxylic acid with four carbon atoms.
(i) Name the carboxylic acid formed from butanol and draw its structure. Show
all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
name ..................................................................................................................
structure
[2]

(ii) Ethanoic acid can be formed from ethanol by fermentation. It can also be
formed by the addition of a suitable chemical reagent.
Name the reagent needed to convert ethanol into ethanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the type of chemical change which occurs when ethanol is
converted into ethanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Describe how a student could prepare the ester methyl ethanoate in a
school laboratory.
In your description give
● the names of the two starting organic chemicals,
● the essential reaction conditions needed,
● a chemical equation for the reaction.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]
65) May 2017 [42] Q (6)
6 (a) An homologous series is a ‘family’ of organic compounds whose names
have the same ending.
(i) Name the homologous series for which the names of the organic
compounds end in –ene and -oic acid.
-ene ...................................................................................................... [1]
-oic acid ................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State two characteristics of an homologous series.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Propan-1-ol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols. It reacts in
the same way as ethanol with acidified potassium manganate(VII) and with
carboxylic acids.
Name the type of compound that is formed when propan-1-ol is heated with
acidified potassium manganate(VII), ..................................................................
ethanoic acid and a suitable catalyst. ................................................................
[2]

(c) The structure of prop-2-enoic (acrylic) acid is shown.
(i) What would you see if prop-2-enoic acid were added to

aqueous bromine, ..............................................................................................
a solution of sodium carbonate. .........................................................................
[2]
(ii) Prop-2-enoic acid can be polymerised to form poly(acrylic acid).
Suggest the type of polymerisation that occurs and draw one repeat unit of
the polymer.
type of polymerisation ...................................................................
repeat unit
[3]
66) May 2017 [43] Q (2_a)
2 Cyclopropane is a colourless gas.
Cyclopropane reacts with bromine at room temperature. The chemical
(a) (i) What is the empirical formula of cyclopropane?

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What colour change, if any, would you see when cyclopropane is bubbled
into aqueous bromine?
initial colour ........................................................................................................
final colour ..........................................................................................................
[2]

67) May 2017 [43] Q (4_a, b, d)

4 Gasoline is used as a fuel for cars. It is a mixture of hydrocarbons.
(a) Name the raw material from which gasoline is obtained.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) One of the compounds in gasoline is heptane, C7H16. Heptane is a
saturated hydrocarbon.
(i) What is meant by the term saturated hydrocarbon?
saturated ............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
hydrocarbon .......................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) To which homologous series does heptane belong?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give two characteristics of an homologous series.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Complete the chemical equation for the complete combustion of heptane.
C7H16 + ..........O2 
→ ....................... + .......................
[2]
(d) The formula C4H10 represents two structural isomers, A and B.
(i) Name isomer A.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is meant by the term structural isomers?
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Isomer B reacts with chlorine in a substitution reaction.

Give the conditions required for the reaction to occur and draw the structures
of two possible products, one of which is organic and one of which is not
organic.
conditions ...........................................................................................................
structures of products
[3]
68) Nov 2017 [41] Q (4_a, b, c, i, e)
4 (a) Ethanol, C2H5OH, can be made by fermentation.
(i) Complete the chemical equation for the formation of ethanol by
fermentation.
C6H12O6 
→ ......C2H5OH + ..............................
[2]
(ii) State two conditions required for fermentation.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2..........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Ethanol can also be made by the catalytic hydration of ethene. The
C2H4 + H2O 
→ C2H5OH
(i) Name a suitable catalyst for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the maximum mass of ethanol that can be made from 56 g of
ethene.
maximum mass of ethanol = ............................. g [2]

(c) Ethanol can be oxidised to form ethanoic acid.

(i) Name a suitable oxidising agent for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Carboxylic acids react with alcohols to make esters.
The structure of an ester is shown.
Draw the structures of the carboxylic acid and alcohol from which this ester
can be made.
Give the names of the carboxylic acid and alcohol.
structure of the carboxylic acid
name of the carboxylic acid

........................................................................................................
structure of the alcohol
name of the alcohol

....................................................................................................................
[4]

69) Nov 2017 [42] Q (3_d, e, f)

(d) Dodecane is an alkane containing 12 carbon atoms. Ethanol can be
manufactured from dodecane in a two-stage process.
In stage 1, each molecule of dodecane is converted into three molecules of
ethene and one molecule of another hydrocarbon.
(i) Name the process which occurs in stage 1.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction which occurs in stage 1.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
In stage 2, ethene reacts with steam to produce ethanol.
(iii) State two conditions needed for stage 2.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Name the type of reaction which occurs in stage 2.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Suggest how to test the purity of the ethanol produced.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Ethanol can also be manufactured by the fermentation of glucose,
C6H12O6.
(i) State two conditions needed for the fermentation of glucose.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation for the fermentation of glucose.
C6H12O6 
→ ......C2H5OH + ..............................
[2]
(iii) One disadvantage of fermentation is that the maximum concentration of
ethanol produced is about 15%.
Suggest why the concentration of ethanol produced by fermentation does not
exceed 15%.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Give one other disadvantage of manufacturing ethanol by fermentation.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) Give one advantage, other than cost, of manufacturing ethanol by

fermentation.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) Suggest the name of a process to obtain ethanol from a mixture of
ethanol and water.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Ethane-1,2-diol has the following structure.
(i) Write the empirical formula of ethane-1,2-diol.

....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Ethane-1,2-diol can undergo condensation polymerisation but cannot
undergo addition polymerisation.
Explain why ethane-1,2-diol cannot undergo addition polymerisation.
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Ethane-1,2-diol undergoes condensation polymerisation with molecule Y.
The diagrams represent the structures of ethane-1,2-diol and molecule Y.
Draw the condensation polymer formed between ethane-1,2-diol and

molecule Y.
Show one repeat unit. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the
linkage.
[3]
(iv) Name the type of condensation polymer formed between ethane-1,2-diol
and molecule Y.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

70) Nov 2017 [43] Q (4_e)

(e) Some fuel cells use ethanol, C2H5OH, instead of hydrogen. Carbon dioxide
and water are products of the reaction in an ethanol fuel cell.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the overall reaction occurring in an ethanol
fuel cell.
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State an environmental problem caused by the release of carbon dioxide
into the atmosphere.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the process by which ethanol can be manufactured from a
renewable resource.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Name the process occurring when electrical energy is used to break down
an ionic compound.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
71) Nov 2017 [43] Q (6)
6 (a) Alkanes and alkenes are two homologous series of hydrocarbons.
(i) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the general formula of the homologous series of
alkanes, ..............................................................................................................
alkenes? .............................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Other than having a general formula, state two characteristics of a
homologous series.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) The structure of an alkene molecule with the molecular formula C4H8 is
shown.

Draw the structure of a different alkene molecule with the molecular formula
C4H8. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[1]
(v) What term describes molecules with the same molecular formula but
different structural formulae?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) 25 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon, CxHy, were burnt in 150 cm3 of oxygen.
This was an excess of oxygen.
After cooling, the volume of the gases remaining was 100 cm3. This consisted
of 75 cm3 of carbon dioxide and 25 cm3 of unreacted oxygen. The water that
was produced in the reaction was liquid.
All volumes were measured at the same temperature and pressure.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
............................. cm3 [1]
(iii) Complete the table to show the smallest whole number ratio of volumes.
[1]
(iv) Use your answer to (b)(iii) to balance the chemical equation. Deduce the
formula of the hydrocarbon.
CxHy(g) + ......O2(g) 
→ ......CO2(g) + ......H2O(l)
formula of the hydrocarbon = ............................. [2]

72) Nov 2017 [43] Q (7_b)

(b) Starch is a natural polymer made from glucose.
(i) What type of polymerisation occurs when glucose is converted into starch?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of reaction occurs when starch is converted into glucose?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Starch can be represented as shown.
Complete the diagram below to represent the structure of the glucose

monomer.
[1]
73) May 2018 [41] Q (6)
6 The table shows the structures of four hydrocarbons.
(a) Why are compounds P, Q, R and S known as hydrocarbons?

............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Compound P is saturated.
What is meant by the term saturated?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Compound P undergoes a substitution reaction with chlorine.
(i) What is meant by the term substitution reaction?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State a condition required for this reaction to occur.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Compound R undergoes an addition reaction with bromine.

(i) Why is this reaction an addition reaction?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A compound containing bromine is formed in this reaction.
Draw the structure of this compound. Show all of the atoms and all of the
bonds.
[1]
(e) Draw the structure of an unbranched isomer of compound S. Show all of
the atoms and all of the bonds. Name this unbranched isomer of compound S.
structure
name ..................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) Compound Q undergoes polymerisation.
(i) Name the polymer formed.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation to show the polymerisation of compound
Q.
n CH2=CH2 
→
[2]
(g) Amino acids undergo polymerisation to form proteins. Part of a protein
molecule with the linkages missing is shown.
Draw the linkages on the diagram. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]

(h) The structure shows an ester.
Write the word equation for a reaction which could be used to make this ester.
....................................................................................................................... [3]
74) May 2018 [42] Q (7_c, d, e, f)
(c) Compounds T and V both have the molecular formula C3H6O2.
● Compound T produces bubbles of carbon dioxide gas when it is added to
aqueous sodium carbonate.
● Compound V is an ester.
(i) What is the name given to compounds with the same molecular formula but
different structures?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structures of compounds T and V. Show all of the atoms and all
of the bonds.
compound T
compound V
[2]
(iii) All compounds with the molecular formula C3H6O2 can undergo complete
combustion in an excess of oxygen.
Complete the chemical equation for this reaction.
C3H6O2 + ................... 
→ .................... + ...................
[2]
(d) Compound W has the molecular formula C2H6O. Compound W reacts
when heated with ethanoic acid and a catalyst to produce a sweet‑smelling
liquid.
(i) Give the name of the homologous series to which compound W belongs.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Draw the structure of compound W. Show all of the atoms and all of the
bonds.
[1]
(e) Alkanes and alkenes are hydrocarbons.
(i) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the general formula of:
alkanes ...............................................................................................................
alkenes ...............................................................................................................
[2]
(f) Ethanol can be produced from long‑chain alkanes as shown.
Describe the two‑stage manufacture of ethanol from the long‑chain alkane

octane, C8H18.
Include:
● the names of the types of chemical reactions that occur
● reaction equations
● reaction conditions.
step 1 .................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
step 2 .................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [5]

75) May 2018 [43] Q (4)

4 Ethanol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols.
(a) Give two characteristics of members of a homologous series.
1 .........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The structure of ethanol is shown.
Complete the dot‑and‑cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a

molecule of ethanol. Show outer shell electrons only.
[2]
(c) Ethanol can be produced by the catalytic addition of steam to ethene or by
the fermentation of glucose.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the production of ethanol by the catalytic
addition of steam to ethene.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the production of ethanol by the fermentation
of glucose, C6H12O6.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State one advantage of producing ethanol by the catalytic addition of
steam to ethene.
Your answer must not refer to cost.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) State one advantage of producing ethanol by the fermentation of glucose.

Your answer must not refer to cost.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Ethanol can be oxidised to ethanoic acid.
State the chemical reagent needed to oxidise ethanol to ethanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol in the presence of an acid catalyst. The
products are an organic compound and water.
(i) Draw the structure of the organic compound formed. Show all of the atoms
and all of the bonds.
[2]
(ii) State the name of the organic compound formed.
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Which homologous series does the organic compound formed belong to?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Ethanoic acid, CH3COOH, is a weak acid. It reacts with copper(II)
carbonate to form the salt copper(II) ethanoate, Cu(CH3COO)2.
(i) What is meant by the term weak when applied to acids?
....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how a crystalline sample of copper(II) ethanoate can be prepared
starting with ethanoic acid and copper(II) carbonate.
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Write the word equation for the reaction between ethanoic acid and
copper(II) carbonate.
....................................................................................................................... [1]

Periodic Table of Elements
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 117 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

Paper 4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Paper 4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

All variants in one paper

Topic 2 Separation Technique 15

Topic 3 Atoms, elements and bonding 25

Topic 4 Formula, Chemical equation and calculations 76

Topic 5 Electrochemistry 109

Topic 6 Rates of Reactions 140

Topic 7 Energy Change 171

i Contents Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

Topic 8 Reversible Reactions 191

Topic 9 Acids, Bases, Salts and Test of ions 214

Topic 10 The periodic table 246

Topic 11 Reactivity series and Metals 261

Topic 12 Air and Water 300

Topic 13 Non-metals 310

Topic 14 Organic Chemistry 327

ii Contents Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

Positive ions Negative ions Common Acids

Zinc Zn 2 Carbonate CO 32

1 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (2_i)

2 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

The following results were obtained

Explain why nitrogen diffuses faster than chlorine.

3 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

4) May 2012 [32] Q (1_c)

(a) Is X a solid, a liquid or a gas at room temperature, 20 °C?

4 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

6) Nov 2012 [33] Q (3)

5 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

6 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

8) May 2014 [33] Q (2)

7 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

(ii) What is the significance of temperature t °C?

(iii) What is the physical state of compound X in the region EF?

8 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

11) Nov 2015 [33] Q (1_b)

9 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

13) Nov 2016 [41] Q (2)

(a) Name the changes of state represented on the diagram.

In which container will the pressure be higher? Explain your answer.

10 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

14) Nov 2016 [42] Q (1)

state separation of particles arrangement of particles movement of particles

11 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

15) Nov 2017 [41] Q (2)

12 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

16) Nov 2017 [42] Q (1_a, b)

13 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

17) Nov 2017 [43] Q (7_a, i, ii)

14 1 – States of Matter Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

15 2 – Separation Technique Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

1) May 2010 [31] Q (4_b, iii)

A simple distillation B fractional distillation C evapouration

D chromatography E filtration F diffusion

16 2 – Separation Technique Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

4) May 2013 [32] Q (7_c)

17 2 – Separation Technique Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

sample 1 Rf = ................ It is ..................... acid.

18 2 – Separation Technique Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

19 2 – Separation Technique Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

20 2 – Separation Technique Mostafa Barakat (0100 165 44 62)

10) Nov 2016 [42] Q (7_c)

(i) How is an Rf value calculated?